Академический Документы
Профессиональный Документы
Культура Документы
a.!
Stuart
E*qf c
HERME s
HERMES
OR
A PHILOSOPHICAL INQVIRY
CONCERNING
VNIVERSAL GRAMMAR
I
AMES HARRIS
ESQ.
JI2IBNAI
eAPPOTNTAZ
E1NAI
EOT2.
OF
LONDON;
PRINTED FOR
M.DCCC.VI.
ff'5/4-
ClerkewdK
H3
To
the Right Honourable
PHILIP
Zorrf
HARDWICKE,
My
Lord,
AS
more
self
;
no one
the folio wing Treatise to your Lordship, its End being to investigate
the Principles of those Powers. It has a farther claim to your Lordship's Patronage,
by being connect-
ed in some degree with that politer Literature, which, in the most important
e
scenes
of Business,
you
have
A2
The
above
is
Dedication printed as- it originallystood, the Author being desirous that what he intended as a real Respect to the noble Lord, when living, should now be considered, as a Testimony of Gratitude to his
Memory.
DEDICATION.
have
still
found time to
cultivate.
With
vernment ;
to
whom
for this
am
more
indebted, than to your Lordship, whether I consider you as a Legislator, or as a Magistrate, the
first
am,
My
Lord,
James Harris.
PREFACE.
JL
HE
chief
End
proposed by the
and inquiry ; not to teach them himself by prolix andformal Lectures, (from
ty
become Teachers
to themselves,
by an im-
partial use of their own understandings. He thinks nothing more absurd than the
notion of Instruction, as if Sci^ ence were to be poured into the Mind,
like
common
waits to
that
comes.
The
may
of the
tree, that
to their just
maturity.
men
to
thy of their contemplation, this the Author declares to have been his first and principal motive for appearing in print.
Next
to that, as
lo-
He
tinction to others
were never prosecuted with the least regard to lucre, so they are no way calculated for any lucrative End. ral therefore and ingenuous
The
libelie
(whom
has mentioned already) are those, to whose perusal he offers what he has written.
Should
his attempt, he
to confess,
Hoc juvatet
melli
est.
For
PREFACE.
For tho he hopes he cannot be charged
with the foolish love of vain Praise, he has no desire to be thought indifferent, or
insensible to honest
vii
Fame.
From
he has endeavoured to treat his subject with as much order, correctness, and perspicuity as in his
performance,
and contemptible methods of anticipating pardon for a bad that " it was the
scorns those trite
He
hasty
" "
fruits of a
few
idle hours
tyittcn
;
never
" revised ; published against consent, at " the importunity of friends, copies " (God knows how) having by stealth
"gotten abroad;' with other stale jargon of equal falsehood and inanity.
we not ask such Prefacers, If what they allege be true, what has the A4 world
May
/.
viii
PREFACE.
world to do with them and their crudities.
As
can say
this in
its behalf,
that
it
itself to
what
its
patiates freely into whatever is collateral; aiming on every occasion to rise in its inquiries,
and
to pass,
as
far as
possible,
from
is
it
small matters
to the greatest.
Nor
formed merely upon sentiments that are now in fashion, or supported only by
such authorities as are modern.
Many
Authors are quoted, that now-a-days are but little studied ; and some perhaps,
whbse very names are hardly known.
>it
The Fate indeed of ancient Authors (as we have happened to mention them)
is
A few
of
of the
goes by their name, just suffices to give them a kind of nominal existence.
The
PREFACE.
The
rest
ix
obscurity,
names
those subordinate
No-
Now
the
should venture to bring his reader into such company as these last, among peo-
ple
(in>
t he
Author of
this
these
speculations have
(and it is to be feared he has) what method had he best take in a circumstance so critical ?
done
Let us suppose him to apologize in the best manner he xan, and in consequence of this, to suggest as
follows
P R
He
ETA C K
of antient Architecits
hopes there will be found a pleasure in the contemplation of ant lent sentiments, as the view
ture^ tho' in ruins, has something venerable.
Add
but
to this,
what from
little
antiquithat very
velty
to meet.
Farhe has
as the Authors,
whom
quoted, lived in various ages, and in distant countries; some in the full maturity
of Grecian and Roman Literature; some in its declension ; and others in periods still more barbarous, and depraved ;
it
may
culation, to see
how
the
SAME REASON
has at all times prevailed; how there is ONE TRUTH, like one Sun, that has enlightened
human
Intelligence
it
through
the dark-
from
and Error.
to
enlarge the
Mind
PREFACE.
Mind, than these extensive mews of Men, and human Knowledge ; nothing can
more
effectually take us offfrom the foolish admiration
xi
of what
is
immediately
to
and help us
ajuster
Literature.
It
is
perhaps
little
too
much
the multitude in
every
nation, that
as
they
know
worth knowing. As we BRITONS by our situation live divided from the whole
world, this perhaps will be
found
to
be
case.
And
hence
trymen
in every kind
and
Tht
PREFACE,
The Author of this Treatise Would bi/ no means detract from the just honours
due
to those
of
his
Countrymen, who
ei-<
or preceding age,
have so illustriously adorned it. But tho he can with pleasure and sincerity join in celebrating their deserts, he would
not have the admiration of these, or of any other few, to pass thro blind excess
into a contempt of all others.
Were such
Admiration
without any fault of their own, would contribute in a manner to the extinction
of Letters.
that of admiring only the authors of our own age, is that of admiring only the authors of one particular
like evil to
Science.
There
is
indeed in
this
last
prejudice something peculiarly unfortunate, and that is, the more excellent the
Science,
to
the
more
produce
this effect.
There
PREFACE,
There are few Sciences more intrinsic colly valuable, than MATHEMATICS.
It
is
hard indeed
have more
Utilities
of Life,
of Science.
or to the sublimest
0/'LoGIC,0r
9
UNIVERSAL REASONING.
It
is
thro
the stated
plified in
dicament of Quantity.
By marking the
force of these Forms, as they are applied here, we may be enabled lo apply them of ourselves elsewhere. Nay farther
still
ments, we may come to know in part, what kind of Being it is; since MIND,
like
other Powers,
its
from
Operations*
Whoever there~
fore will
study Mathematics in this view, will become not only by Mathematics a more expert Logician, and by Lo-*
iv
PREFACE.
a wiser Philosopher, and an acutcr Reasoner, in all
of science or deliberation.
instead of being applied to this excellent purpose, are used not to exemplify Logic, but to sup-
ply
into
its
fact an obstacle.
universal, come
to
years
a species
Numbers
to
only;
they
grow
insensibly
believe
Reason-
horseman
horse.
to
be
inseparable
from
his
And
sity
thus
we
even
Knowledge
PREFACE.
its
xv
in some
Such then
is
the
Author of
city
of antient quotations, with which he has .filled his Book. If he can excite in
a proper spirit of curiosity
;
his .readers
if he can help in the least degree to en-* large the bounds of Science ; to revive
the decaying taste &f antient Literature ; to lessen the bigotted contempt of every
Au-
may
be
to
allowed^ that
lie
has
done a service
mankind.
son for his
Should
be a rea-
Work
it
h^has con"he-
fest already,
event.
would be no unpleasing
let it
peacether
PREFACE
t her
the productions of
vicum
vendentem thus
et
odores.
ADVERTISEMENT.
The Header
is
&c. he refers
to
year 1744.
THE
xvii
THE
CONTENTS.
BOOK
Chapter
I.
I.
Introduction.
whole.
-
Design of the
-
page
Chap.
II.
its
smallest
-
p.
Chap.
p.
Attributives,
63 and
Chap. VII. Concerning Time and Tenses* p. 100 Chap. VIII. Concerning Modes, p. 140 Chap. IX. Concerning Verbs, as to their Species and other remaining
Properties.
2L
-
p.
173
Chap.
xviii
CONTENTS.
Chap. X.
Chap.
XL
Concerning
Secondary Order,
p.
192
BOOK.
Chapter
Chap.
I.
II.
Concerning
Definitives.
II.
those
-
called Conjunc-
Chap.
p.
-
261
289
BOOK
Chapter
I.
III.
Introduction
the Subject into
Division of
its
principal
Chap.
II.
Chap.
CONTENTS.
Chap.
III.
xix
Upon
the
Form, or peculiar
Character of Language.
p.
327 350
or univer-
p.
Chap
V. Subordination of Intelligence
Difference of Ideas, both
in particular
Men, and
in
whole
Nations
Different
Genius
guages
English
guages
sion.
p.
403
LATELY PUBLISHED,
DEDICATED (BY PERMISSION) TO HIS MAJESTY,
In two very handsome Volumes in Quarto, printed on a fiee
Woven Royal
Paper, hotpressedj
ILLUSTRATED WITH
From
Price
.3
13 6 in Boards,
An
BY
HIS SON,
WINGRAVE,
Where may be
in the Strand.
had,
A New
Edition of
printed in
Price
12 6
in
Boards.
N. B. The
Life,
in
Octavo,
may be
had separate.
HERMES
MERMES
OR
A PHILOSOPHICAL ENQUIRY
CONCERNING
UNIVERSAL GRAMMAR.
BOOK
CHAP,
I.
I.
INTRODUCTION.
Design of the Whole.
IF
Men by
had never
felt
an Im-
pulse to converse one with another: And if, like lower Animals, they had been by nature irrational, they could
not have recognized the proper Subjects of Discourse. Since SPEECH then is
the joint Energie of our best
Faculties/") (that
is
to say,
B
()See V.
and Note
I. p.
147 to 169.
xix. p.
2
son
al
HER
and our
M E S.
being with-
social Affection)
tion, as
Men; those Inquiries may surely be deemed interesting as well as liberal, which either search how SPEECH may be naturally resolved ; or how, when resolved,
it
may be
a large
us.
again combined.
field
HERE
SPEECH,
its
opens before
We
as divided into
constituent
Parts, as a Statue
several
its
may be
divided into
Limbs
or else, as resolved
into
Matter and Form., as the same Statue may be resolved into its Marble
and Figure,
THESE
different
tions constitute
PHICAL, or UNIVERSAL
GRAMMAR.
WHEN
Grammaticam etiam bipartitam ponemus, ut alia sit literaria^ alia philosophica, $c. Bacon, de Augm. Scient. VI. 1. And soon after he adds Verumtamen hac ipsu,
<*>)
Grammaticam
qua?i-
$iam
3
thus Ch.
as
I.
SPEECH
first
we may then
consider,
it,
compounded.
And
here in the
place
Synthesis,
which by combining simple Terms prothen by combining two produces a third; and thus
and
others,
till
in
continued De-
monstration,
we
are
by a of SCIENCE.
led, as
Now this is that superior and most excellent Synthesis, which alone applies itself to our Intellect or Reason, and
B
Aristotle says
ra/y
o"i=
which
X, ***
stance,
Of
Man,
ne6lion^ there
So
De
yap
a-vvQsffiv
x^ $tciigE<rtv t$i
TO ^sv^os re xj TO
in Composition
and
Division,
Composition makes affirmative Truth, Division makes negative, yet both alike bring terms together, and so far
therefore
may be
called synthetical.
HERMES.
conduct according to Rule, constitutes the Art of LOGIC.
to
^^ which
W
AFTER
inferior
this
we may
turn to those
Ammonius
phrastuS) which
in
his
Comment on
the Treatise
here inserted at length, as well for the Excellence of the Matter, as because it is not (I
is
T Xoya
rs
<T%t<7u$, (xa9*
Sivgifftv
0Eocp*r-) rys
ots
xj
ffvifAatmt
n,
rys
I1PO2 TOYS
T^v
rxV/v
iifltx.'))
af1
jc,
T^V
pyloptxri,
egyov
roc,
onJlatis
Ix.hiyeo'Qizi
Ta
a ruv
ovoftdruiv,
aAXa py
KOIVOC
x^
?c
oTcra/
re
Toy
/y
CTE/0W
-xf^uBi^oc. K
T^J SE
HPOS TA HPAFMATA
T%
Relation of
rS Xoy
vJ/fDJ-
/eXE'y;ai, >^ TO
aXj0r a7ro^xvyy.
Speech being twofold (as the Philosopher Theophrastus hath settled it) one to the HEARERS, to whom it explains
BOOK THE
Pleasant in
all their
kinds.
These
latter
Compositions aspire not to the Intellect, but being addressed to the Imagination,
the Affections,
and the
Sense,
become
THINGS,
concerning
which the Speaker proposes to persuade his Hearers: With respeffi to the first Relation, that which regards the
HEARERS, are employed Poetry and Rhetoric. Tims it becomes the business of these two, to select the most reWords, and not those that are common and of vulgar use, and to connect such Words harmoniously one with another-, so as thro' these things and their consespectable
quences,
such
as Perspicuity,
Delicacy,
and
the other
Forms of Eloquence,
vity, all
and BreHearer,
employed
and
strike him,
the
power of
Persuasion.
Zo
On
THINGS,
avit
San&ius speaks elegantly on the same subject. CreDeus hominem rationis partidpem ; ad, quia Sociabilem esse voluit, magno pro munere dedit Sermonem.
Sermoni autem perjidendo tres opifices adhibuit. Prima est Grammatica, qua ab oratione solcecismos Sf barbarismos
expellit ; secunda Diale&ica, quce in Sermonis veritate vcr-> satur; tertia Rhetorica, qua? ornatum Sermonis taritum
in.
1.
li c. 2.
HERMES.
-
ch
'
*
-^^J
become from
either
_jf-
RHETORIC
or
POETRY.
need we necessarily view these Arts distinctly and apart we may ob;
NOR
serve, if
we
please,
how
perfectly they
i$
co-incide.
GRAMMAR
equally rerest.
quisite to every
one of the
And
though LOGIC
out
cessary to these last is a sound and correct LOGIC, that without it, they
are
Trifles.
these Inquiries (as we have said already) and such others arising
Now
from them as are of still sublimer Contemplation, (of which in the Sequel there may be possibly not a few) may
with justice be deemed Inquiries both
interesting
and
liberal.
AT
present
we
shall
postpone the
is
to say,
Logic
7
I.
that
is
to say,
UNIVERSAL GRAMMAR.
laid
In this
we
SPEECH, as a WHOLE, into its CONSTITUENT PARTS; then resolving it, as a COMPOSITE, into its MATTER and FORM two Methods
down,
first
dividing
of Analysis very different in their kind, and which lead to a variety of very different Speculations.
we sometimes de-
scend to things, which appear trivial and low let him look upon the effects,
;
to
which those things contribute, then from the Dignity of the Consequences,
let
Principles.
/
following Story may not impro" When the pe'rly be here inserted. " Fame of Heraclitus was celebrated
THE
"
throughout Greece,
" tain
3
-h.
I.
HERMES.
tain Persons, that had a curiosity to " see so great a Man. They came, and,
" as it happened, found him warming " himself in a Kitchen. The meanness " of the place occasioned them to stop " upon which the Philosopher thus ac" costedthem ENTER, (say she) BOLD" LY, FOR HERE TOO THERE ARE " GODS."
;
WE
is
no
part of Nature too mean for the Divine Presence ; so there is no kind of Subject,
'
having its foundation in Nature, that is below the Dignity of a philosophical Inquiry.
( e>
1.
1. c. 5.
CHAP.
CHAP.
II.
smallest Parts.
A HOSE
ture, are
Na-
Ch.
II,
not
first to
Man.
Nature be-
gins from Causes, and thence descends to Effects. Human Perceptions first
open upon
and thence by slow Often had degrees ascend to Causes. Mankind seen the Sun in Eclipse, before they knew its Cause to be the Moon's Interposition; much oftener had they
Effects,
Revolutions
of
to
Nature,
Themzstius's
Comc.
men t on
\.
I.e. 2.
x
De Anima,
1.
2.
2.
10
Ch. IL
H E R M E SL
in
tion, if
we except a few
Artists
and
cri-
tical
1.
2. c. 2.
It leads us,
when properly
regarded, to a very
Important Distinction
Intelligence
as first
;
Human.
between Intelligence Divine and GOD may be said to view the First,
as last
;
that
is,
he views Effects
MAN
that
is,
views the
and the
First,
as last
he views
Causes through Effects, in an inverse Order, and hence the Meaning of that Passage in Aristotle : uxrrrfp you? roe.
rys
NS-f wpos
//.ETtpas-
-vj/y^rjj
roc.
TV
tyvcrzt
irtivlay.
so is
are the Eyes of Bats to the Light of the Day, Man's Intelligence to those Objects, that are by Na-
As
1.
2. c. 1.
and most conspicuous of all things. MeSee also I. 7. c. 4. and Ethic. Niconi*
in the
I.e. 4.
Ammonias^ reasoning
2x ruv antes-spay
qrpditvoit'
(rvvQeruv Iwi
TeXwoTepa
upiiAurtpx'
to,
"Ovru
yv ^
<rrx~s
o^c
slpoct /XEV
Xoyov, KJ
bvo//,a
E^frrxleT, olSa'
rocvTtx.
<y
TBTOV
avaXyira;
sis
eruXXa^as-,
x.oix.t'iv/z
sTs
fo/^sia, WX.ET/*
Hu-
more imperfect and complex to the more simple and per* feet ; for the complex Subjects are more familiar to us^ and better known. Thus therefore it is that even a Child
Jcnozvs
how
;
to
walketh
but
put a Sentence together, and say, Socrates how to resolve this Sentence into a Noun
and
11
example All men, even the lowest, can speak their Mother-Tongue. Yet how many of this multitude can neither write, nor even
in
for
THUS
SPEECH
read
far literate,
mar, which respects the Genius of their own language ? How few then must
GRAMMAR
UNI-
VERSAL
cular
that
Languages,
in
doing which we
shall
and
Syllables
in
Am.
Com
de Praedic. p. 29,
12
Ch.
II.
HERMES.
shall follow the
Order consonant to
hit*
man
Perception, as being for that reason the more easy to.be understood.
WE
Speech, which is obvious .to all and thence pass, if possible, to those its pri;
essential,
WITH
him in his Mother-Tongue, rrot to know when 'tis we assert, and when we question ; when 'tis we command, and when we pray or
so ignorant, as if
we
address
wish ?
The
Man
And is
sounds,
Is J J fit for Treasons
* Merchant of Venice.
Or
13
II.
Friends,
feet,
I hear
way
the tread
of nimble
Hasting
'tis
this
tences,
the other
upon Sensation.
the
WHEN
When
Witch
in
Macbeth says to
her Companions,
this
'tis
evident
is
an interrogative Sen-
tence.
WHEN
Banquo,
WHEN
* P. L. IV. 866.
14
Ch.
ii,
HERMES.
WHEN
Milton says in
thje
character
thec,
and youthful
Jollity,
WHEN
dise
Lost
we read
And
chiefly thou,
that dost
prefer
Before
all temples th
(if I
tis
WHAT
differing
Are they
Classes
?
no way reducible
certain definite
15
ever
try,
Speech or
Motion of his SouL So it indeed is in every one that speaks, excepting alone the Dissembler or Hypocrite; and he
too, as far as possible, affects the ap-
pearance.
SOUL (over
and above the mere nutritive) may be included all of them in those of PERCEPTION and those of VOLITION. By the Powers of PERCEPTION, I mean the Senses and the Intellect ; by the Powers of VOLITION, I mean, in an extended
sense, not only the Will,
Passions
moves
II. 4.
16
Ch.
II.
H E R M E S.
moves
to
ir-
rational.
IF then the leading Powers of the Soul be these two, 'tis plain that every Speech or Sentence, as far as it exhibits the Soul, must of course respect
we
assert,
then
is
it
a Sentence
which respects t^e Powers of PERCEPTION. For what indeed is to assert, if we consider the examples above alleged, but to publish some Perception either of
the Senses or the Intellect ?
He
17
What
who
Ch.
II.
either wish or pray ? Those, who feel certain wants either for themselves, or
others.
IF then the
Soul's*
Powers,
it
TENCE WILL BE EITHER A SENTENCE OF ASSERTION, OR A SENTENCE OF VOLITION. And thus, by referring all
of them to one of these two classes, have we found an expedient to reduce their
infinitude.
THE
'POIJEOK av
on
rvis -vJ/y^Sj*
<$s
rys
<unx.izs,
ra,s v&s'
O'IQV
//,EV
1$
yvu?tx.izs, rots
ras
TUV ovruv,
Ss, xatfl'
(Xsyu
vSv,
yvuriKols
[ASV,
xa0'
diiarBycriv'
ogexliK&s
as
opiyofAtBoc,
ruv ayoiQvv,
v>
olov
v[MV,
^ EW/0y/x,/#v)
rot,
MEN
rl
Aoya
(rye.
ruv ogsxlixuv
^vs,
18
Ch.
II.
H E R M E S.
THE
Extensions of Speech are quite
as
indefinite,
may be
seen
if
we eompare
^xp
aJJS
nYSMATIKOY ^ EPHTHMATIKOT
/
ry^s
T/vor
KAHTIKOY,
19
wap' aJiS
T^J
ITT<
ETXHZ,
//.ovov
AE
TO
AI1O<I>ANTIKON
v
aTro
TWV
EV.
Tlie
in
the Text,
we
take
its
translation
from the Latin Interpreter. Bicendum anima nostra ditplicem pbtestatem habeat^
vitce,
igitur est^
cum
cognitionis^
vcro cognitionis
ut
metis,
vis est,
appetitus
verofacultas
qua bona, vel quce sunt, vel quce videnut sunt voluntas, comilium, ira, cu-
fwr, concitpiwimus,
piditas
partibus animi proficiscuntur , qua? cuncupiscunt ; nan cum animus ipseper se agit, sed cum ad aliiun se convertit, qui
id, quod cupit, conducere posse videaetiam vel rationem ab eo exquirit, ut in ora; atque tione, quam Percunctantem out Interrogantem vacant;
ei ad,
consequendum
tur
vel
ran
cupit,
quicum
loquitur^
19
ar-
Ch n.
-
But the
longest Extension,
with
to do,
is
is
SENTENCE.
The
to
Grammar, but
of them are
following
description
com
pound
atque in kac, vel ut a prcestantiore, ut in Deprecatione ; eel ut ab inferiore, ut in eo, qui proprie Jussus nominaSola autem Enuncians a cognoscen di facilitate projftur.
tiscitur
:
hceque nuntiat
rerum cognitionem,
quce in nobit
falsumque capit
prceiereavero nulla.
/
Ammon.
in Libr.
de Interpretatione.
( c)
Aoy-
fyuvY)
<rvv9ery
a"npa.vrtKii,
vis
EVIO
ivroi, ffv)p(x.tvi
n.
Arist.
Poet.
c.
20.
terpret. c. 4.
C2
20
Ch.
II.
HER M E
pound Quantity of Sound
significant.
/
S.
THUS when
I say [the
Sun
sliinetli]
not only the whole quantity of sound has a meaning, but certain parts also, such
as
[&m] and
[shineth."]
say?
Have
so
these
in
which are
manner
significant,
and
may
?
the
Can
we suppose
be
self other
this
all
divisible,
Sound significant,
itself significant.
And
this is
what we
For
call the
proper character of a
W WORD.
Prisclan's
Diffifo cst
(d)
<J>
W y^
a"r)(AavTiKr>,
ys
fjt.fg&>
<^E'V
jf / xa(T avro
De
Poetic,
c.
20.
Definition of a
pars
21
II.
Whole, every
WORDS
imply
:
so divisible
it
follows that
WORDS
parts of Speech, in as
less
much
all.
as nothing
To
Pars autem, quantum ad totum intelligendum id adtotius sensus intellect urn. Hoc autem ideo dictum
ne quis conctur vires in duas paries dividere, hoc
;
est,
in vi fy res
sio.
To
non enim ad totum intettigendum hcccjitdiviPriscian we may add Theodore Gaza. Ai%is $\,
fAEf-'
IXa^fov itara <rvvra%iv -Xoya. Introd. Plato shewed them this characteristic of a
Cratylus, p. 385. Edit. Serr.
Gram.
1.4.
Word
See
22
HERMES.
To know therefore the must needs contribute
of Speech, as
its
it
species
to the
of Words,
minutest Parts.
CHAP.
23
CHAP
Concerning the
III.
species
of Words,
the
JL^ET us first search for the Species of Words among those Parts of Speech, commonly received by Grammarians.
For Example, above cited.
The
in
ch. Hi.
v-*"v
And
sounds.
Is Jit for treasons
[The']
is
an ARTICLE
all
[Man]
some
NOUNS,
[That] and [Himself] are PRONOUNS [Hath] and [is] are VERBS [mov'd] a
PARTICIPLE
[And] a
[Not] an
ADVERB
[In] [With]
CONJUNCTION C 4
and
HERMES.
[For] are
PREPOSITIONS.
all
In one
sentence
we have
those Parts of
Speech, which the Greek Grammarians are found to acknowledge. The Latins
only differ in having no Article, and in separating the INTERJECTION, as a
among
more Species of Words ? why so many ? or if neither more nor fewer, why these and not others ?
are there not
To
Queries, let us examine any Sentence that comes in our way, and see what
differences
we can discover it its Parts. For example, the same Sentence above,
The
Man
fyc.
ONE
Difference
soon occurs,
that
some Words are variable, and others inThus the Word Man may be variable. varied into Mans and Men ; Hath, into
Have,
25
III.
Fitter
and
Fittest.
On
Words
The, In, And, and some others, remain as they are, and cannot be altered.
AND
the
first
some Languages have them, and others have them not. Thus
because
only
the Greeks have
Thus the
Greeks and Latins vary their Adjectives by the triple Variation of Gender, Case,
and Number whereas the English never vary them in any of those ways, but through all kinds of Concord preserve them still the same, Nay even those very Variations, which appear most necessary, may have their places supplied by other methods some by
;
Auxiliars, as
when
we
26
Cb.
III.
HERMES.
we
Sa y 5 O Brutus, to Brutus, j*
;
some by
For
is
is
we
known any where from its Variation, in English only known from its Posi-
tion or place.
and Invariable
pose, let
more
essential.
SUPPOSE then we should dissolve the Sentence above cited, and view its several
Parts as they stand separate and detached. Some 'tis plain still preserve a
Meaning (such as Man, Music, Sweet, &c.) others on the contrary immediately
lose it
Not
all,
(such as, And, The, With, &c.) that these last have no meaning at
neA^er
have
it,
but
when
company, or associated.
Now
27
Ch.
III.
Now
it
tinction, if any,
was
essential.
For
all
Words are significant, or else they would not be Words and if every thing not
;
absolute,
all
is
of course
relative,
then will
Words be
or relatively.
respect therefore to this Distinction, the first sort of Words may be calFd significant by themselves; the latter
WITH
may
if
be calFd
we
or
may be
call'd Principals,
The
sis
first
of an Arch, which are able to support themselves, even when the Arch is destroyed
in its
;
or Curve, which can no longer stand, than while the whole subsistsW.
Summit
(c)
Auillus-
Grammar)
different
power
28
Ch.
III.
H E R M E S.
^
we
THIS
power of
OLVSU
$
Letters.
"En,
ov
rfoirot
ruv s-o/j^e/W r
roc.
piv
(puvwsvrtX:, a,
05
<rv/x,<po>va, oi
TUV
fyuvniviuv
sTFivona-xi v.<i<n\
ax E^ ruv
farwi
AE'^EWV.
T*JV lK>uvifi<riv.
'TOV oivrov
at piv
yag
avluv,
rgoww nvx
TUV &&vv)EVTuv
avrcfvy/x,/a/v,
cyToii
eiffi'
xoLvtzirsg ITT*
0,1
E-Tr/pp/xaT^V
ro;y
oppuv, TUV a-yvs^a'y* ret yap TGU#T# a?/ TWV In the same manner , as of the Ele-
ments or Letters^ some arc Voiccls^ izhich of themselves complete a Sound; others are Consonants., tthich without
the help of Vowels have no express Vocality
;
so likewise
may we conceive as
like Vowels^ are
to the nature of
Words.
Some of them,
is
of themselves expressive^ as
;
the case of
Prepositions, Articles,
own proper strength^ as is the case of and Conjunctions ; for these parts
is,
when
L-
Apollon. de
Syntax!.
CUit
1.
Sf
NOMEN
VERBUM SOLAS
Sf
trabcx, c&tcra
4*
quomoautem (id
cera, stuppa,
$ claii $
similia) vincula
conglutina-
29
without being the Energies or Affections of some other thing. If they exist as the
Thus
to
to think is
the attribute of a
Man
be white*) of
to be
a Swan
to fly y
of an
Eagle;
SUBSTANCES*.
Thus
Man, Swan, Eagle, and Horse, are none of them Attributes, but all Substances,
exist in
may
Time and
these, nor of
any thing
do they
tiones
est,
tabularum
trabium) non
Prise. L.
XL
913.
Nv
ftsv
av
vTroKSifAsva,
Metaph. Z.
y.
p. 106.
Ed. Sylb,
30
HERMES.
AND thus all things whatsoever, being
Substances or Attributes, it follows of course that all Words, which are
(f)
either
significant as Principals,
must needs be
So that
as
ALL WORDS
whatever,
significant
SUBSTANTIVES
Words, which are only significant as Accessories, they acquire a Signification either from being asso-
AGAIN,
as to
ciated
to one
to
If
Word alone, then as they can do no more than in some manner define or
determine, they
may justly
son
and Attribute
Seclts
c. 1.
seems to have been admitted by Philosophers of all and ages. See Catagor. c. 2, Metaphys. L. VJI. DcCcelo, L. III. c. l.
31
If to ma- ch
-
DEFINITIVES.
nr.
then as they serve to no other purpose than to connect, they are called for that reason by the name
ny Words at
once,
of CONNECTIVES.
AND
thus
it is
that
all
WORDS
what-
ever are either Principals or Accessories ; or under other Names, either significant
from
tion.
themselves,
or significant by rela-
by relation, they are either So that unDefinitives or Connectives. der one of these four Species, SUB-
WORDS,
included.
however
different,
in a
manner
IF any of these
unusual,
more
usual,
;
NOUNS
the Attributives,
VERBS
the
Definitives,
32
Ch.
III.
HERMES.
Definitives,
nectives,
the Con*
SHOU'D it be ask'd, what then becomes of Pronouns, Adverbs, Prepositions, and Interjections the answer is, either they must be found included within the Species above-mentioned, or else must
;
be admitted
themselves.
for so
many
Species by
were various opinions in ancient Days, as to the number of these Parts or Elements of Speech*
Plato in his * Sophist mentions only Aristotle two, the Noun and the Verb.
THERE
treats
of
Not
Philosophers were ignorant of the other Parts, but they spoke with reference to
Logic
* Tom.
I. p.
t De Interpr.
&
3.
S3
Ch. nr.
combined make a perfect assertive Sentence, which none of the rest without them are able to effect. Hence therefore Aristotle in * treatise his of Poetry (where he was to lay down the elements of a more varietwo,
because
these
alone
gated
(g)
duct)
NOMEN
Paries igitur orationis sunt secundum Dialecticos <5f VERBUM ; quid hce soles etiam per se con-
jun6lce
alias
autem paries
appellabant.
vvtK&lyyogypot.ra,')
consignificantia
Priscian.
qucestio, cur
teles sc.)
duo ionium, NOMEN fy VERBUM, se (Aristodeterminate promittat, cum plures paries ora-
est,
tantum
quantum
illi
ad
id,
quod
suffecit.
tis
enuntiativa oratione, quce scilicet hujusmodi est, ut Junetantum Verbis et Nominibus componatur. Quare sutionis paries ,
orationis,
totius
simpliciter
instituit
element a
partiri.
Apolfrom the above principles elegantly calls the NOUN and VERB T l^v^ratrx pipi T Aoye, the most animated
lonius
parts of Speech.
De
Syntax!,
1.
1.
c 3. p. 24.
.
See also
34
x
HER
III.
M E S.
Ch.
gated speech) adds the Article and Conjunction to the Noun and Verb, and so adopts the same Parts, with those established in this Treatise.
To
Aristotle's
authority
(if
re-
added that
also of the
THE
Parts
latter
Stoics
instead
of four
made
five,
by detaching
;
Noun
the Parti;
and
farther,
from the
it
WE
flfi
For
this
HalicarnassuS)
lian follows,
we De
Inst.
Orat. Sel. 2.
4.
whom
Quinti-
L I.e.
Diogenes
Ijitertius
and
Priscian
35
ch
-
WE
of Halicarnassus and
Aristotle,
by
CO
HI.
with Theodectes, and the more early writers, held but three Parts ofspeech, the Noun, the Verb, and the
Conjunction.
This,
it
must be owned,
Tongues,
accords
with
the
oriental
other.
But
as to Aristotle,
we have
own authority to assert the contrary, who not only enumerates the four Species which we have adopted, but
ascertains
finition.*
D
(*)
To
See the places quoted in the note immediately preAntiquissima eorum est opinio, qui trcs classes factEstque hcec Arabum quoque sententia Hcbroei quo-
ceding.
(*")
unt.
que (qui) cum Arabes Grammdticam scribere desinerent^ artem earn demum scribere cceperunt, quod ante annos c6ntigitcirciter quadringentos) Hebrcei,
Immo
shim numerum
olios,
Dubium, utrum ea in re Orientales imitati sunt antiques Gr&corum, an hi polius secuti sunt Orientalium exemplum.
Utut
visse,
est)
etiam veteres Grcccos ires tantum partes agnoest Dionysius, &c. Voss. de Ana.
log.
1.
1.
1. c.
Sup.
p. 34.
36
Ch.
HERMES.
m.
To conclude
fol-
lowing Chapters will be a distinct and separate consideration of the NOUN, the
VERB, the ARTICLE, and the CONJUNCTION; which four, the better (as we apprehend) to express their respective natures, wechuseto call SUBSTANTIVE s, ATT RIB UTIVES,DEFINITIVES, and CONNECTIVES.
CHAP
37
CHAP.
IV.
so
OUBSTANTIVES
THE
first
sort
THERE
not
own making.
we
Watch, Telescope,
fyc.
refined operation of
consider
it
D3
dence.
38
Ch. IV.
HERMES.
For example, from Body we abstract to Fly ; from Surface, the being White ; from Soul, the being Temperate.
dence.
thus
butes into
this
such as Flight,
Temperance ; or else by others more general, such as Motion, Colour, Virtue. These we call
the second
Now
all
those several
Substances
tural Substances,
Animal
is
a Genus;
Man, a Species,
dual.
is
Alexander, an Indivi-
In
artificial
;
a Genus
Species;
this
Individuals.
As
39
therefore every '; GENUS may be Ch. iv. found whole and intire in each one of its
Species ; (for thus Man, Horse, are each of them distinctly a
and intire Animal) and as every SPJECIES may be found whole and intire in each one
thus Socrates, Plato, and Xenophon, are each of them completely and distinctly a Man) hence
of .its Individuals;
(for
jt
that every Genus, though ONE, is multiplied into MANY; and every Speis,
cies,
though ONE,
is
MANY, by reference
beings which
are their proper subordinates. Since then 720 individual has any such subordinates, it
MANY, and so
as,
D
( fl )
FROM
in
This
is
when he
talks of
tvos
Sophist,
For
the
common
defi-
nition of
Genus and Species, the Isagoge or Intro-, duclion of Porphyry to Aristotle's Logic.
HERMES.
these Principles it is, that Words following the nature and genius
FROM
BESIDES
(J )
Yet sometimes
Num-
In the
first
place the
human
even
in the smallest
nation, that
for every
would be
difficult
to
invent a
new Name
it
new-born Individual.
and
are called
'tis
Hence then
cus and
happens
that
many
many
called Antonius ;
and thus
the
MarRomans
had
Marci and Antonii, as we in later days have our Marks and our Anthonies. Now the Plurals of
their Plurals,
this
sort
may be
it
is
merely by chance that the Names coincide. There seems more reason for such Plurals, as the Ptolemies, Stipios, Catos, or (to instance in
or Family
is
so that the
the specific
family
Name
third
extends to
the Kindred,
as
Name
contributed to
make proper
Plural, was the high Character or Eminence of some one Individual, whose Name became after-
Names become
all
those,
who
4i
ch IV
-
visible in Substances,
is
that of
SEX. Every Substance is either Male or Female ; or both Male and Female ; So that or neither one nor the other.
with respect to Sexes and their Negation,
Substances conceivable are comprehended under this fourfold consideraall
tion.
Now
being rare,
doubtful
hence Language,
who had
every
Thus
great Critic
was
call'd
an Aristarchus
;
SL
A DANIEL
cries
come
to judgment!
yea a DANIEL,
express the
when he would
known
verse,
MARONES.
So
Lncilius,
4>AEQONTE2;
T.
I. p.
J)
AETKAAinNES.
JLucian in
Timon.
108.
42
Ch. IV.
HER
which
are
ME
S.
more obvious,
considers
As
own
the Female,
$c.
are
by
eminently distinguished^
most
Languages have
different Substantives,
and the Female. But as to those animal Species,- which either less frequently occur, or of which
to denote the .Male
one Sex
is
less
apparently distinguished
from the other, in these a single Substantive commonly serves for both Sexes.
IN
Aristotle.
JAEV
appsvx,
roc.
$t SnjAaa, ra.
fjt,ertz%v-
Poet,
the
21.
established
same Distinction, calling them apfax, Sfaex, ^ 0-x.svn. Where mark what were afAristot. Rhet. L. III. c. 5*
terwards called
roc.
a&T,
43
Ch. IV.
seems a ge-
neral rule (except only when infringed by a figure of Speech) that no Substantive
is
Male animal
stance
;
always
Neuter.
BUT
many
all
of them have Words, some masculine, some feminine (and those too in great
which have reference to Substances, where Sex never had existence. To give one instance for many.
multitudes)
MIND
;
is
IN
Nam
Naturam Sexui non
quicquid per
achignatur,
Consent, apud
quce tuitu-
worth perusing.
44
Ch. IV.
HER M E
IN
S.
distinctions
seem owing to nothing else, than to the mere casual structure of the Word itself: It is of such a Gender, from having such a Termination or from belonging
;
logy to that great NATURAL DISTINCTION, which (according to Milton) animates the World.%
\
"
conspi-
to
to
Eminence,
+ Mr. Linnaeus, the celebrated Botanist, has traced the Distinction of Sexes throughout the whole Vegetable World*
and made
it
Method.
45
p.
IV.
wise/'
the contrary were "such, as were conspicuous for the At" tributes either of receiving, of con*i taining, or of producing and bringing
THE FEMININE on
" forth or which had more of the ; pas" sive in their nature, than of the ac" tive or which were beau;
" "
tiful
and amiable
"
UPON
the
from communicating Light, which was native and original, as well as from the vigorous
("Hxi-, Sol) as Masculine,
SUN
warmth and
efficacy of his
Rays
the
MOON
(SeXTjvoj,
being the Receptacle only of another's Light, and from shining with rays more
delicate
and
soft.
THUS
46
Ch. iv.
HERMES.
THUS
First in
Milton,
HIS East
the glorious
Lamp was
seen,
all
tli
;
Horizon round
Moon
But
opposite, in 'levelfd
West was
set,
His
HER
none.
Light
other light
SHE needed
P. L. VII. 370.
By
Virgil they
Sister,
were considered as
Brother and
which
still
preserves
obnoxia surgere
LUNA.
G.
or
I.
396.
Greek and Latin Masculine, as being the source of those showers, which impregnate the
is
THE SKY
ETHER
in
Earth.
47
universally Feminine, from being the grand Receiver, the grand Container,
^^j
from being the Mother (either mediately or immediately) of every sublunary Substance, whether
but above
all
animal or vegetable.
im-
./ETHER
in
CON JUG is
gremium
ILJETJE,
descendit,
omnes
allt
Magnus
fastus.
THUS
J
Shakespear,
COMMON MOTHER,
infinite
all
Tim. of Athens.
So Milton,
Whatever
Earth,
yields,
ALL-BEARING MOP. L. V.
THER,
So
* SeneciB Nat.
t nft/x>5rop yy
Quoest.
HI. 14.
Graec. Anth, p, 281.
x^s
48
Ch. IV.
HERMES.
So
Virgil,
alit
TELLUS^
.
viresque
XL 71.
rious things, of
Goods, $e\
their Vessel,
Men, Arms, Provisions, Hence Sailors, speaking of " SHE rides at say always,
is
" anchor"
"SHE
(IToXtf,
under
sail."
A CITY
TRY,
Civitas)
and a COUN-
are feminine also, by being (like the Ship) Containers and Receivers, and farther by being as it
(Harpis,
P atria)
THUS
S<o
nv
v,
us
:
0HAY
x}
MHTEPA
de Gener. Anim.
1. c. 2.
49
eh. iv.
THUS
Salve,
Virgil,
Sa-
turnia Tellm,
MAGNA VIRUM
brave Greeks,
Tcticc.
ei
Epigram on those
at Chceronea,
who
fell
BE TiaTi
HoKftQi
vSv
Their
PARENT COUNTRY
*
in
HER
bosom-
holds
So Milton, The City, which Thou seest, no other deem Than great and glorious Rome, QUEEN"
of the Earth.
Par. Reg. L. IV.
As
to the
OcEAN,tho' from
all
its
being
the Receiver of
many
Vegetables
* Demost.
in Orat.
de Corona.
50
en. TV.
HERMES.
Vegetables and Animals, it might justly have been made (like the Earth)
Feminine; yet
deep Voice and boisterous Nature have, in spight of these
its
reasons, prevailed to
make
it
Male.
In-
--
mighty Efficacy upon every thing around us, is by the Greeks and English justly consider-
TIME
(xjov*) from
his
ed as Masculine.
distich,
*
Thus
X&\/'
in that elegant
Xoi/^
TexTftjj/ 8 cro(cc
So
Anth.
p.
290.
51
Ch. IV.
Whom
doth
HE
gallop withal?
to the gallows.
As you
like
it.
and the English DEATH, seem from the same irresistible Power to have been consiGreek Qdvz<7*> or
A'/vj,
THE
dered as Masculine.
that
would
treat as
TAKE
Milton in
his Paradise
Lost not
a Person^ but consider him as Masculine: in which he was so far from introducing a
of his own, or from giving
it
Phantom
much
the Sanc-
many
of their Deities.
52
Ch. IV.
HERMES.
i
Callimachus
his
Friend Heraclitus
Ai Se Teal ZWSITLV
av\$oi/e
9
yet thy sweet warbling strains Still live immortal, nor on them shall
DEATH
His hand
IN the
or
Ravager of
all
Alcestis of Euripides,
is
DEATH
;
drama
Apollo
well
too, that
SLEEP and
by Homer.
Brothers
It
was to
this old
luded,
life lie
when
lay slumbering on his Death-bed. Friend asked him, " How he did?"
SLEEP.
53
Ch.iv. (replied the old Man) is just " upon delivering me over to the care of
SLEEP
"
his
BROTHER^.""
Shakespear, speaking of Life, merely Thou art Death's Fool ;
labour
st
THUS
For
HIM Thau
shun,
by thy flight to
still.
And yet
runst towards
HIM
Meas.
for
Meas.
So Milton.
Dire was the
Despair
tossing,
Tended the
couch
:
sick,
busiest
from couch
to
And
DEATH
HIS
dart
Shook
XL
489 tf>.
E
(e)"H&7
THE
T'
pe
O YFINOS
olgxsrxt
&xg!Xx.xroiriQEffQ(Zi
AAEA$m.
tf)
a female Death
suppose
we
read,
And
HERMES.
supreme
Dens, Dieu, &c.)
Being
is
(God,
and
as
He
is
the Creator of
all,
the Fa-
Gods and Men. Sometimes indeed we meet with such words as To Dfo/Tov, To 0aov, Numen, DEITY (which last we English join to a neuter, saying Deity itself) sometimes I say we meet with these Neuters. The reason in
ther of
GOD
prior to all things, both in dignity and in time, this Priority is better cha-
racterized
some Opposite, as
Male
*
.-
What
a falling off
How
weakened
55
-
example
is
co-ordinate with ch IV
$c.<s\
VIRTUE
most of
its
('A^TVI,
Virtus)
as well as
Species, are
all
Feminine,
perhaps from their Beauty and amiable Appearance, which are not without
effect
corrupt.
E4
abash' d
te)
TO IlPfiTON
$ovruv T^MV
&*>
r *>v
ri
TIX-S
TO S^Ay O-VTOI^OV' TO (lege TW) ^f I1ANTHI yoc,^ oifpwi oTav ct<rv/xo;y AITIHI o-yfo^ov ^'v' aXXa
AFEAHS
TON
EON
IfgOTt-
T^Oi']
TO
ToJy (7/>(,VOTE^Oy
7EVWV T
V^CJ/XV
&VTQV
izgo(rotyoglvo(j(.tv.
PRIMUM
dicimuS) quod
inte-
theologian* nobis
fabularum
gumentt? obvolutam tradiderunt, vel marts vet fcemin& conjuga turn specie fingere ausus est : idque merit o :
enim maslfaminmum
est.
LUTE AC
Immo
vcro
cum
masculino genere appellamus, ita ipsum nojnmamus, genus prazstantius submisso atque humili prceferentcs Ammon. in Lib. de Interpr. p. 30. b. w yx% tvxvriw r
DEUM
n^wTw
&*.
Aristot.
Metaph. A.
p.
210. Sylb^
56
Ch. IV.
His
HERMES.
abash'd the Devil stood,
;
And felt how awful Goodness is, and saw VIRTUE in her shape how lovely saw,
and pin'd
loss
P. L. IV. 846.
as being,
the
(rvgoiwa,
or
Co-ordination of
Opposite^.
TH;E Fancies, Caprices, and fickle Changes of FORTUNE would appear but awkwardly under a Character that w as
r
Male
from Prodicus.
See Memorab. L.
II. c. 1
As
men-
Pythagoras Samias
:
omnium
bonum
fy
rerum
L. IV.
initia esse
fy
bina
utfmitum
6f infinitum^
inalum, vitam
mortem, diem
noctem.
1. c.
De
57
Beaus succeed
to her
good graces.
Hor.
is
Female^ not so easy to explain, unless it be that female Passions of all kinds were
WHY
the
considered as susceptible of greater excess, than male Passions ; and that the
Furies were to be represented, as Things
superlatively outrageous.
Talibus Alecto dictis
eocarsit in iras.
At Juveni
artus
;
Diriguere oculi
dris,
tot
Erinnys
:
sibilat
Hy-
Tantaque
se
fades aperit
turn
flammea
torquens
Lumina
58
Ch. IV.
HERMES
Lumma
Repulit,
cunctantem
fy
qu&rentem dicerc
crinibus an-
plura
$ geminos
erexit
gues,
hczc addi-
En ! Ego
victa situ,
&c.
/En. VII. 455W.
HE
<#
Languages, though they are diversified with Genders in the manner described, yet never vary the Gender which
they have once acquir'd,
except in a few
instances,
hcec
doubtful.
We
and so of the
in our
rest.
But
it is
otherwise
in English.
We
own
is
Virtue
language say, Virtue is its own reward, or her own reward ; Time maintains its wonted
his
Pace, or
Time maintains
is
wonted Pace.
There
ables us
to
a singular advantage in this liberty, as it enmark, with a peculiar force, the Distinction
between the severe or Logical Style, and the ornamental or Rhetorical. For thus when we speak of the above
Words,
59
Cb. IV.
Words, and of
When we give them Sex, by making them Masculine or Feminine, they are from thenceforth personified ; are a kind of intelligent Beings, and become,
as such,
others naturally devoid of Sex, as of them as they are, and as becomes speak
all
Thus Milton,
The Thunder,
light'ning
and impetuous
P. Lost.
I.
174.
and Thun-
der, God's Ministers of Vengeance, and so personified them, had he afterwards said its Shafts for his Shafts,
his
much nearer
to Prose.
The
following Passage
is
is
II.
174.
In
this
Place His
j
Hand
lier's or It
s,
by immediately
God himself,
I shall
the Avenger,
60
Ch. IV.
tetic, in his
HERMES.
Commentary on
the Treatise
de Interpretatione, where the Subject is treated at large with respect to the
Greek Tongue. We shall only observe, that as all such Speculations are at best but Conjectures, they should therefore be
and quit
this
Hills rctir'd
his voice
and went
P. L. VI.
Here
7
all
the
Y alleys smile,
renewed.
Suppose then the Poet had been necessitated by the laws of his Language to have said Each Hill retired to ITS
Place
Heaven renew' d
would
ITS
wonted face
how
prosaic
;
and
lifeless
how
detrimental to the Prosopopeia, which he was aiming to In this therefore he was happy, that the establish !
Language, in which he wrote, imposed no such necessity ; and he was too wise a Writer, to impose it on himself.
It
were
their parts.
61
-
be received with candour, rather than ch IV Varro's words scrutinized with rigour.
on a Subject near akin, are for their aptness and elegance well worth attending.
silva,
Non
n'eque eo,
tritce
;
quo
semitce
To conclude
this
both
to
NUMBER
and
GENDER
appertain
first
WORDS,
because in the
place
they appertain to THINGS ; that is to say, because Substances are Many, and
have either Sex, or no Sex
stantives have
;
therefore Sub-
Number, and are Mascuor Neuter. There is line, Feminine, however this difference between the two
Attributes
:
NUMBER
in strictness delast
Rank
of
De
Ling.
Lat
L. IV.
62
Ch. IV.
HERMES.
of Species^: GENDER on the contrary stops not here, but descends to every
Individual,
so
however
diversified.
And
much
(*)
is
that
it
the cause of
p. 39.
CHAP.
63
CHAP.
V.
V\
are
now
to
Ch v proceed to a SECOX-
DARY RACE
of SUBSTANTIVES^ Race
menquite different from any already tioned, and whose Nature may be explained in the following manner.
EVERY
itself
either
an Object
first
yvw7zug>
latter
I.
1. c. 16. p.
49.
1.
2. c. 3.
Thus Prisdan
fy
Interest
strationem
64
ch
-
H E R M E S.
v
-
latter it
quaintance.
Now
tween
will
often
TV}
happen
Tf#Tvj
Objects
till
that instant unacquainted with say, What then is to be done ? each other.
How
other,
shall
the
Speaker
address the
when he knows not his Name ? or how explain himself by his own Name, of which the other is wholly ignorant
expedient upon this occasion seems to have been AeK;^, that is,
first
The
Pointing, or Indication by the Finger or Hand, some traces of which are still to
But
fecit
?
Ego
relatio vero
Secundam Cognitionem
Lib.
signifi-
de quo jam
dixi.
X1L
p. 936.
Edit.
65
which Words,
Substantives or
Nouns, were terized by the Name of 'AwMvptai, or PRONOUNS(^). These also they distin-
for charac-
guished into three several sorts, calling them Pronouns of the First, the Second,
and the Third Person, with a view to certain distinctions, which may be explained as follows.
the Parties conversing to be wholly unacquainted, neither Name nor
SUPPOSE
'ANTONOMAZOMENON.
p. 106.
Apoll. de Synt.
L. II.
c.
5.
Prisdan seems to consider them so peculiarly destined to the expression of Individuals, that he does not say they supply the place of any Noun, but that of
the proper
original,
Name
only.
is
and
still
And
NOMEN
est
pars orationis,
quce
66
ch
-
HERMES.
v
-
Here, to supply the place of Pointing by a Word of equal Power, they furnished the Speaker
I.
write,
I
is
say,
and
as the
Speaker
always
dis-
own
Pronoun of
AGAIN, suppose
Conversation to be the Party addrest. Here for similar reasons they invented
the Pronoun,
walkest, Sec.
THOU.
and
next in dignity to the Speaker, or at least comes next with reference to the
discourse
called the
;
LASTLY, suppose the Subject of Conversation neither the Speaker, nor the
Party addrest, but some Third Object, Here they provided different from both. another Pronoun. HE, SHE, or IT,
which
6i
Ch. V.
AND
thus
it
to be distinguished
by
their respective
PERSONS^).
F2
As
Cc >
The
is
who took
;
it
from dpollonius.
tertia.
Personce
Pronominum
sunt ires
prima, secunda,
cum ipsa, qua loquitur, de se pronuntiat; cum de ea pronundat^ ad quam directo sermone Secunda, loquitur ; Tertia, cum de ea 9 quse nee loquitur, nee ad
Prima
est 9
se directum accipit
Sermoncm. L. XII.
p. 940.
Theo-
dore Gaza gives the same Distinctions. n^Zrov (izgoffuTrov sc.) & isegi eavls (pgoifyi o Xe'ywV S^cfotj w &i%l TW, tsgos ov o
f
-
p.
is
com-
which makes the First the Speaker; the Sethe Party addrest ; and the cond, Third, the Subject.
one,
mon
For
and Second be as commonly described, one the Speaker, the other the Party addrest ; yet till become subjects of the discourse^ they they have no ex T
istence.
ject, this
is
Again as to the Third Person's being the mha character, which it shares in common with
both
68
Ch. V.
x
HERMES.
As
to
NUMBER,
it:
Person has
(I)
once
both the other Persons, and which can never therefore be called a peculiarity of its own. To explain by an
instance or two.
his adventures,
When Eneas
Person immediately appears, because he makes Dido^ whom he addresses, the immethe second
for
1500 Verses
we
up
the Narrative.
In the mean time the First Person may be seen every where, because the Speaker every where is himself the
Subject.
as
he says himself,
course
of this Narrative
but then
it
is
always by a
Figure of Speech,
in fa<^t 10
when
those,
who by
many Third
Persons
because a Speech
may
many,
as w^ll as to one.
(HE) has the plural (THEY), because the Subject of discourse is often many
at once.
BUT
Number,
tho'
it
all
Greek, or Latin, or any modern Language, that those of the first and second
Person carry the distinctions of SEX. The reason seems to be, that the
Speaker
The
real Second
Person (Dido)
is
Thus
far as to Virgil.
Euclid,
we
reason is, that neither Speaker nor Party addrest, (in which light we may always view the Writer and his reader) can possibly become the Subject
whole Work.
The
else,
ex-
itself,
nor
spoken to by another.
70
Ch. V.
HERME
S.
Speaker and Hearer being generally present to each other, it would have
been superfluous to have marked a distinction by Art, which from Nature and even Dress was commonly^) apparent on both sides.
But
this
does not
hold with respect to the third Person, of whose Character and Distinctions,
(including Sex
the discourse.
among
the rest)
we
often
And
hence
it is
that in
most Languages the third Person has its Genders, and that even English (which allows its Adjectives no Genders at all) has in this Pronoun the triple^) distinction of He, She, and It.
HENCE
(&)
L. XII.
p. 109.
Priscian. Demonstratio ipsa secum genus ostendit. 942. See Apott. de Syntax, L. II. c. 7. p.
(*)
The
may be
better found
in supposing
away.
we
should
He
caused him
to destroy
htm
71
HENCE
single
too
we
(f)
why
Ch. V.
Pronoun
to each Person,
an I
and a Thou to the Second, are abundantly sufficient to all the purF4 poses
to the First,
him
is
here thrice repeated, stood each time for something different, that is to say, for a Man, for a Woman, and for
of
its
Taking the Pronoun in this manner, divested Genders, how would it appear, which was de;
stroyed
that
moved
doubts,
when we hear
when
He
caused him to
destroy him, we are told with the proper distinctions, that SHE caused HIM to destroy IT. Then we know with
certainty,
that the
Promoter
;
Quceritur tamen cur prima quidcrn Persona 6f sccttnda singula Pronomina habeant, tertiam vero t>ex diversae
<fl
indicent voces ?
Ad quod
respondendum
est,
quod prima
quidem $ sccunda Persona ideo non cgent diversis vocibus, quod semper prajsentes inter se sunt,, <$f demonstrative ;
tertia vero
cst, ut.
Hie, Iste
72
Ch. V.
H E R M E S.
p OS es of Speech.
But
it is
not so with
respect to the Third Person. The various relations of the various Objects exhibited by this (I mean relations of
same and
nite, fyc.)
different, definite
and
indefi-
necessary that here there should not be one, but many Proit
made
IT must be confessed indeed, that all these Words do not always appear as
Pronouns.
selves,
When
when we sa}^ THIS is Virtue, or SewrLxSg, Give me THAT) then are they Pronouns.^ But when they are associated to some Noun (as when we say, THIS Habit is
Virtue; or <5axTJxw, THAT Man defrauded me) then as they supply not the
place of a Noun, but only serve to ascertain one, they fall rather into the
Species of Definitives or Articles. That there is indeed a near relation between
Pronouns
73
V.
some words it has been doubtful to which Class to refer. The best rule to distinguish them is this The genuine
always stands by itself, assuming the Power of a Noun, and supplace never stands by
PRONOUN
its
plying
but appears at
all
times associated to something else, requiring a Noun for its support, as much
as Attributives or
fe)
Adjectives.
As
"A0ov lAfla. ovo/xo]-, xj v *Av?wvy/A/a av? oyo THE ARTICLE stands WITH a Noun; but THE PRONOUN
fe)
To
stands
FOR a Noun.
ergos
rot,
Apoll. L.
I. c. 3.
p. 22.
*At/)^
its
ra agBgx, rys
rw
vTrorsrayiAivnv avTaw/x/av
Now
Articles Ihetfl-
selves,
when they
quit their
is
into such
Again
proper upon the occasion. Ibid. "Orav TO "AgQgov yw /AST' ovopizr -S7afaXa/x^av9Ta/,
Pronoun, as
&
>c]s0//x,0a,
i,
ex
'cyoiff'ns
slyc
Eyf/yo/^svov /W,ET*
VT*
ov^ar'
-CTa^X^0J7.
When
the Article
74
v.
H E R M E S^s
nouns,
to the Coalescence of these Proit is,
as follows.
The
First or
Second
will, either
of them, by themselves
assumed without the Noun, and has (as &e explained before) the same Syntax, which the Noun has ; it must of
cle is
because
it
appears without a Noun, and yet is in Power assumed for one. Ejusd. L. II. c. 8. p. 113. L. I. c. 45. p. 96.Inter
Pronomina
mina eaputantur,
qua;,
cum
:
com-
Articuli vero
cum PronominiDonat.
Gram.
p. 1753.
AR-
TICULIS
FINITOS ca
ARTICULOS appellabant ; ipsos autem Articulos, quibus nos carcmus, INFINITOS ARTICULOS dicebant. Vel, ut alii dicunt) Articulos connumeral) ant Pronominibus, Sf
ARTICULARIA
p. 574.
eos
PRONOMINA
first
vocabant, &c.
Pris. L. I.
///c, calls
them
De Ling.
indeed in
Lat. L. VII.
his
Vossius
Analogia (L. opposes because Hie has not the same power with the Greek
Article
.
c. 1.)
this
Doctrine,
But he
Writers
75 but not
Ch. v.
good
sense, as
to say in
THOU AM THOU
reason
is,
THOU ART
is
I.
The
for the
no absurdity
say,
I am He; or for the Person addrest ; as when we But for the same say, Thou art He. Person, in the same circumstances, to be at once the Speaker, and the Party and so addrest, this is impossible
Discourse, as
when we
therefore
is
AND now
perhaps
we have
seen
enough of Pronouns,
to perceive
how
they
to
and determine
their signification.
76
H E R M E S.
v
-
other
Substantives.
The
a kind of -secondary Race, which were taken in aid, when for reaSubstitutes
sons already
mentioned the others could not be used. It is moreover by means of these, and of Articles, which
are
(A)
See these reasons at the beginning of this chapof which reasons the principal one is, that u no ter, " Noun, properly so called, implies its own Presence.
(*)
u It is therefore to ascertain such Presence, that the Pro" noun is taken in aid and hence it is it becomes equi" valent to &?!<*, that is, to Pointing or Indication
;
"
the Finger."
It is
worth remarking
in that
by Verse of
Persius,
est
DIGITO
MONSTRARI,
dicier,
how
ther,
the SE?|/J
and
and made to
Sometimes by virtue of
~
Pronoun of the
third
Quod si
That
is,
militibu* parces,
erit
me
quoque Miles.
/ also
will be a Soldier.
See Vulpius.
77
LAN-
Ch. V.
GUAGE,
which are
ing to be."
But more of
As
Prepositive, as
tives,
may
indeed
all
Substan-
because they are capable of introducing or leading a Sentence, without having reference to any thing previous.
there
is
ANO-
THER
It
may be
respondence, and indeed in all kinds of Writing, where the Pronouns I and You make their appearance, there
is
great a distance.
in Apollonius, rais
And hence the rise of that distinction Sj T v. /xe* rw o-^suv ttvxt $et%is,' r<xs
and some are mental.
c. 3.
De
Syntaxi, L. II.
p. 104,
78
Ch. v.
HERMES.
oqigW in Latin, Qui ; in English, Who, Which, That) a Pronoun having a character peculiar to itself, the nature of which
(in
o$,
;
THER PRONOUN
Greek
may be
explained as follows.
I
SUPPOSE
Body,
was
to say
LIGHT
is
LIGHT
celerity.
The Greeks,
xKltxov
digOgov,
it
must be confest,
subjunctive
call this
Pronoun
it
the
Article.
Yet, as
should seem,
lonius,
this is
Apolor true
when he compares
to the
'cr^orasxl/xov
prepositive Article, not only confesses it to differ, as being exprest by a different Word, and havinga differ-
it
wholly different.
De
KV(>i(t)s
Syntax.
av
L.
I.
c.
43. p. 91.
E/n
g9gov ravlt-
for these
reasons this (meaning the Subjunctive) cannot properly And just before he says, xt>f<W yt be an Article.
a'fflfov
pw
TO ^OTX*?/XOV
is
the Prepositive
The
Latins therefore have undoubtedly done better in ringing it with the Pronouns.
79
Ch V*
and two.
for
25
But
if I
add a Connective
(as
LIGHT
cele-
a Body,
I
AND
it
rity
then by Connection
as
make
the
by cementing many
Wall.
make one
it
is
Powers of a Connective, and another Pronoun, that we may see the force, and character of
in the united
Now
the
Pronoun here
treated.
Thus
there-
fore, if in the
place of
or
AND
IT,
we
substitute
THAT,
WHICH, saying
a Body, WHICH moves with the Sentence still retains great celerity
LIGHT
is
its
if
Unity and Perfection, and becomes possible more compact than before.
We may
this
80
Ch. V.
H E R M E S.
cause
it
cannot
(like
the Prepositive)
introduce an original Sentence, but only serves to subjoin one to some other,
which
is
previous^.
THE
(*)
Hence we
see
why
the
Thus
in that
Verse of Horace,
liber
Qui metuens
Ille
is
vivit^
mihi non
erit unquani.
non
erit liber
Ille
is
one Sentence
another.
Erit and
instances.
Vivit,
The
what corrupt in more places than one) will serve to To shew, whence the above speculations are taken.
vvonxxltx-ov oigOgov lirl fopa.
t'Siov
(psgsrai, cw&<fe/vftv
^a
rvts
^<fav
TW
ovo/
jc T^V Iv tivru
fj.if>.
ru
a'f 0fw)
onsg
KAI
TO KAI
yaf
xo/vov
81
Ch. V.
THE
tx
CTaAa/>i*vE,
jg
T&> TO,
(fors.
T'O TPAMMATIKO2
The
tioned)
is
the
applied to a
nected withal to
Verb of its own, and yet is co'n* the antecedent Noun. Hence it can never
Syn
Z mean
Noun
lative.
or Antecedent, and that which respects the Article or ReThe same too follows as to the Conjunction, AND; This Copulative assumes the antecedent Noun, which is c&-
pable of being applied to many Subjects, and by connecting to it a new Sentence , of necessity assumes a new Verb also.
the
Grammarian came,
the Grammarian came, as if we were to say de Syntaxi, L. 1. c. 43. p. 92. coursed. Apoll.
AND
dis-
See also
The
seem to have well represented its compound Nature of part Pronoun^ and part Connective, in forming their QUI and QUIS from QUE and is, or (if we go with Scaliger to
HERMES.
kinds of Substantives, natural,
or abstract
;
artificial,
or particular.
We may
Man,
&c. &c.
NAY,
of
all
it
may even be
the Substitute
Thus we
say, I,
this
WHO now
Chapter ;
read,
AND
truly a
thus
is
THIS SUBJUNCTIVE
its
Pronoun from
Substitution,
there
Seal de
127.
HOMER
Force of
this Subjunctive,
by help of the Prepositive and a consonant to the Theory here estaConnective, exactly blished. See Iliad, A. Y er. 270, 553. N. 571. n. 54,
Pronoun or
157,158.
83
there being no Substantive existing, in Ch. V. whose place it may not stand. At the
same time,
it is
essentially distinguished
from the other Pronouns, by this peculiar, that it is not only a Substitute, but
withal a Connective^ 1)
*
G2
(V Before we quit
this Subject, it
AND
two
principal Pronouns, that is cond Person, the Ego and the Tw, are implied
very
Form
of the
Verb
yf
***,
scribo, serf*
it
be to
mark a
Contradistinction
such as in
lentus in
umbr&
pect to their oblique G&$#8\ which must always be added, because tho' we see the EGO in Amo, and the Tu in Amas9
we
TE
or
ME
in
Amat, or
Affiant*
Yet even
ner,
man-
according as they
mark
Contradistinction, or not.
34
Ch. v.
HERME
AND now to
S.
SUBSTANTIVES
All
Thus
Virgil,
{/,
$co< So/ey
/A^jy
MOI
where the '/*
XiKTxre
IX.
A.
and both have precedence of their respective Verbs, the In other in""jfyjy even leading the whole Sentence.
stances,
these
Pronouns commonly take their place bemay be seen in examples every where
farther
still.
When
the oblique Case of these Pronouns happened to contradistinguish, they assumed a peculiar Accent of their own,
ogQorovupivat,
or Pronouns
they marked no such opposition, they not only took their place behind the Verb,
it
When
and (as it were) inclined hence they acquired the name And themselves upon of EyxTuroca*, that is. Leaning or Inclining Pronouns.
their Accent,
it.
And Cuntradistinctives, and M, Mo/, Ml for Enclitics. hence it was that Apollonim contended, that in the pasabove quoted from the first Iliad, we shoud read
85
i
STANTIVES
condary, that
to say, according to a
Language more
are either
familiar
and known,
NOUNS
or
PRONOUNS. The
NOUNS
THE PRE-
distinguished into three Orders, called the First, the Second, and the 3
POSITIVE
is
and Chryses.
I*,
p. 20.
This Diversity between the Contradistinctive Pronouns, and the Enclitic, is not unknown even to the English
Tongue.
this case is
When we
say, Give
me
Content, the
(Me)
in
Me
a perfect Enclitic. But when we say, Give Content, Give Him his thousands, the (Me) and (Him)
* See before,
p. 37, 38.
86
ch
-
HERMES
v
-
TH
SuBJ
ti
N c T i v fc
includes the powers of all those three, having superadded, as of its own, the
HAVING
we now proceed
ATTRIBUTIVES,
CHAP.
87
CHAP.
VI.
Concerning Attributives.
ATTRIBUTIVES
ed as Attributes.
are the Words,
Little,
Such
for
example
Writing,
&c>X
G4
fa)
How-
In the above
list
of
Words
are included
what
Grammarians
in as
and
Participles,
much
as all
Hence it is, that as they are all from their nature the Predicates in a Proposition (being all Tery Snow is white, predicated of some Subject or Substance.
Substance.
PHMA
rea-
VERB
is
employed by Logicians
all.
in
an extended Sense
to denote
them
son,
why
a Verb,
xa-njyo^/Acvov
o'pov
Iv
'PHMA
Sound ar-
88
Ch. VI.
HER M E
HOWEVER,
to
S.
ENCE may be
considered as an universal
Genus, to which all things of all kinds The are at all times to be referred.
it,
claim
sential to the very being of every Proposition, in which they may still be
by
when we
Sun
is
we
say,
The
Predicate in a Proposition,
is
called
a VERB,
p.
24.
Edit.
Ven.
Prisciari's
is
Non
cst signification's.
L.
II. p.
576.
And in
another place
he says
git vel disccrnit partcs orationis inter se, sed vis ipsius
89
re- Ch VI.
THE
all
Verbs,
Is,
Groweth, Becometh,
are
of them used to express this general Genus. The Latins have called them
i
Verba Substantiva, Ve?*bs Substantive, but f the Greeks 'P^ara T9r#fXTix* Verbs of
Existence, a
Name more
apt, as being
The principal of those Verbs, and which we shall particularly here consider, is
the Verb,
9
E$l,
Est, Is,
either abso-
Now
say,
all
EXISTENCE
is
lute or qualified
absolute, as
is; qualified, as
is
AN ANIMAL; B
$C.
BLACK,
is
ROUND,
WITH
c. 7. Edit.
Du-ValL
90
Ch. VI.
H E R M E S.
WITH
Verb
(is)
can by itself express absolute Existence, but never the qualified, without subjoining the particular Form, because the Forms of Existence being in
number
infinite, if
the particular
Form
be not exprest, we cannot know which And hence it follows* that is intended.
when
only serves to subjoin some such Form, it has little more force, than that of a mere Assertion. It is under
(is)
the same character, that it becomes a latent part in every other Verb, by
.
expressing that Assertion, which is one of their Essentials. Thus, as was observed just before, Riseth means, is
ing
;
ris-
Writeth, is writing.
AS
to
EXISTENCE
in gene;
or immutable
and
Science.
exist all
Now
and
fu-
ture,
91
But immutable
all
Ch.VL
posed to
things temporary.
AND
Verb
(is) ac-
cording as
table
it
Being.
if
FOR example,
is
we
ripe, (is)
meaneth,
it
it
now
time,
time,
when when
if
is
be rotten.
But
Square
we
say,
The Diameter of
the
incommensurable with
its side,
we do not
it is in^
commensurable now, having been formerly commensurable, or being to become so hereafter ; on the contrary we
intend that Perfection of Existence, to
its
It
meaning we employ
this
we
92
Ch.VL we say,
HERMES.
TRUTH
is
is, or,
GOD
is.
The
commonly
WE
black
are
now
of
to descend to the
com-
mon Herd
and
walk, &c.
Attributives,
to
such as
speak, to
white, to write y
pared and opposed to each other, one of the most eminent distinctions appears to be this. Some, by being joined to a proper Substantive make without
(C J
Cum
NUNC
mutabilUatcm polius substantial^ quam ad tempus aliquod Si autem didmus^ DIES EST, ad nuttam diei referatur.
onem
tnus,
tubstantiam pertinet, nisi tantum ad temporis constitute ; hoc enini^ quodsignificat^ tale est^ tanquam si dica-
NUNC
EST.
Qitai e
cum dicimus
;
ESSE, ut substuntiam
cum vero
ita ut ali-
Boeth.
ii^
93
Sen- ch "VL
-
assertive
while the
rest,
tho* otherwise
they denote a Substance and an AtThe reason is, that they want tribute.
an
Assertion, to
We
an Assertion elsewhere, an
(is) or
(WAS) to complete the Sentence, saying Cicero is wise, Cicero WAS eloquent. On the contrary, when we say, Cicero
writeth,
Cicero
walketh,
in
instances
no such occasion, because the words (writetK) and (walketh) imply in their own Form not an Attribute only, but an Assertion likewise.
Hence
it is
they
may be
resolv-
Now
HERMES.
Ch. VI.
Now
all
make
complex Power into its distinct Parts, and take the Attribute alone, without the Assertion, then have we PARTICIPLES, All other Attributives, besides the two Species before, are insolve this
Name
ADJECTIVES,
AND
that
BESIDES
notice.
Some
Essence in Motion; such are to walk, to Others have it in fly, to strike., to live.
the privation of Motion
others have
it
;
such are
to
And lastly,
nothing
95
White and Black, Wise and Foolish, and in a word the several Quantities and Qualities of all
Great and
Little,
Things.
Now
ADJECT-
VERBS
or
PARTICIPLES.'
Circumstance leads to a farther Distinction, which may be explained as follows. That all Motion is
this
AND
in Time,
and
therefore, wherever
it exists,
But
Motion implies Time likewise. For how can a thing be said to rest or stop, by being in one Place for one instant only ? so too is that thing, which moves with the greatest velocity, -fTo stop therefore or
rest,
t Thus Proclus
eerning Motion.
in the
H^/xSv
rot,
If* re
96
Ch. VI. res t is to ?
HERMES.
be in one Place for more than one Instant, that is to say, during an Ex-
and this of course gives us the idea of TIME. As therefore Motions and their Privation imtension between two Instants,
ply Time as their concomitant, so VERBS, which denote them, come to denote
TIME alsoW. And hence the origin and use of TENSES, " which are so many
" different forms, assigned to each Verb, " to shew, without altering its princi" pal meaning, the various TIMES in " which such meaning may exist/'
Thus
Scribit,
Scripsit,
all
Scripserat,
and
Scribet,
equally the Attribute, To Write, while the difference between them, is, that they denote Writing in
different Times.
denote
SHOULD
(
d)
The
The
^//.
following
31
$'
is
part of
TO
a Verb
is
something,
is
which
signifies
AND ABOVE
If
it
(for such
may
be answered, over and above its principal Signification, which is to denote some moving and energizing. Attribute.
See Arist. de Interpret, c. 3. together with his mentators Ammonias and Boethius.
Com-
97
SHOULD it be asked, whether Time it- ch. VI. v^v^/ self may not become upon occasion the
.Verb's principal Signification
;
it is
an-
ent verbs (as in the words, writeth and speaketh) and different Times by the
words, writeth and wrote) neither of which could happen, were Time any thing more, than a mere
(as in the
same Verb
Concomitant.
Add
to this, that
when
words denote Time, not collaterally, but principally, they cease to be verbs,
and become
stantives.
Of
the
Timely, Yearly, Dayly, Hourly, &c. of the substantive kind are Time, Year,
THE most
is
and Future, nor is any language complete, whose Verbs have not TENSES, to mark these distinctions. But we may go still further. Time past and future are both infinitely
into Present, Past,
extended.
98
Ch. VI.
HERMES.
extended.
Time past
future,
Time
many particular Times future, some more, some less remote, and corresponding to each other under different relations. Even present Time itself is
not exempt from these differences, and as necessarily implies some degree of
does every given however minute.
Extension, as
line,
HERE
then
we
first
reason, which
guage that variety of Tenses. It was not it seems enough to denote indefinitely (or by Aorists) mere Present, Past, or Future, but it was necessary on many
'
occasions to define with more precision, what kind of Past, Present, or Future. And hence the multiplicitly of Futures,
and even Present Tenses, with which all languages are found to abound, and without which it would
Prseterits,
be
difficult to ascertain
our Ideas.
HOWEVER
99
of Ch
-
HOWEVER
TIME, and
as
the
knowledge ^3
the
VJ.
TENSES depends on
this is
Theory of
a subject of no
it
mean
itself
by
H2
CHAP.
300
HERMES.
CHAP.
i
i
VII.
C. VII.
v-r
>^
common, that they are both of them by nature things continuous, and as such they both of them imply Extension. Thus between London and Salisbury there is the Extension of Space, and between Yesterday and To-morrow, the But in this they Extension of Time.
this
in
that
all
Time only
cession^.
() See Vol.
I.
is
p.
To which we
o
may oA-
add, what
said
by Ammonius
v xjtra
%E;.
/xovov
wit ya.%
%<5v(&
yi-
iMt vQtrotratt,
K)
a.^
TO
NTN'
Ix
yf ry
vtaQizi
$Btlgt<rQt TO slvxi
TIME
whole at once, but only in a single Now or INSTANT ; for it hath its Existence in becoming and in ceasing to be.
Aram,
in Predicam. p. 82. b.
101
c
Hence
a?
and properties of Transition go; Time is different from Space but as to those of Extension and Continuity they
fections
;
perfectly coincide.
LET
FARTHER
still-
A POINT
is
the
Bound of every infinite Line; and A Now or INSTANT, of every finite Time. But altho' they are Bounds, they are, neither of them Parts, neither the Point
of any Line, nor the Now or Instant of any Time. If this appear strange, we
II
may
102
C. VII.
HERMES.
that the parts qfany thing extended are necessarily extended also, it being essential to their charac-
may remember,
But
if
a Point or
Now were
extended,
other
Nows
(for
THESE
mitted, and both Points and Nows being taken as Bounds, but not as Parts^ b\ it
will
(pavEgov
or/
p-ogio*
TO
NTN
TS %ov8, uvntg
<T
a/
y^x^^s' 0,1 Se ya//,/x,aii Soo rys fAitxs /xo^;a. /<f 25 evident that a Now o/^ Instant is no more a part of Time,' TJie parts indeed of one Line than POINTS are of a Line.
rys
c.
17.
And
pig',
To
rs yy.% TO
o-yx^70*/
-Qxt IK
TO oXov
rwv /x^o;V
XPONO2
TaJx'NTN.
Part
to be
is
cessarily
made up of its
of Time; for a Whole, and the Whole is neParts ; but TIME doth not appear
^4
Now is no Part
made up of Nows.
Ibid. c. 14.
103
as C. VII.
same manner
the
may be
End
of one
Line, and the Beginning of another, so the same Now or Instant may be the
the Beginning of
for
Let us suppose
example,
the Lines,
A B, B C. B
A
I say that the Point
B is the End
of the
A B,
spect to the Now or Instant, which they include, the first of them is necessarily
PAST TIME,
tHe
104
c. VII.
HERMES.
the other
is
necessarily
FUTURE,
as
being subsequent.
As
Now
or
INSTANT
Time, and without being Time, is Times Bound ; the Bound of Completion
to the Past
y
from hence
FROM
follow
been
To
Ss
NYN
/XEV
Ir/ arvvi^etac
TOV
?$<
57aEX0ovra
x^> T5
ya? r
is
(5
was
Time; for it makes Time continuous the past and thefuthe beginlure, and is in general its boundary, as being one Time and the ending of another. Natur. ning of Auscult. L. IV. c. 19. 2uw^<i in this place means not
Continuity, as standing
im-
105
any such Thing as Time present. For if all Time be transient as well as continuous, it cannot like a Line be present all
together, but part will necessarily be gone, and part be coming. If there-
any portion of its continuity were to be present at once, it would so far quit its transient nature, and be Time no longer. But if no portion of its continuity can be thus present, how can Time possibly be present, to which such
fore
Continuity
is essential.
no such thing as Time Present, there can be no Sensation of Time, by any one of the senses. For ALL SENSATION is of the
than this
If there be
FARTHER
^Present only, the Past being preserved not by Sense but by Memory, and the
BUT
Tay-nJ
ya
(atta-Qna-et sc.)
TO
rf ov ftoyoy.
106
c. vir.
HERMES.
BUT
if
ject of any Sensation ; farther, if the Present never exist ; if the Past be no more ;
if
the Future be not as yet ; and if these are all the parts, out of which TIME is
compounded how strange and shadowy a Being do we find it ? How nearly ap:
proaching to a perfect Noil-entity^? Let us try however, since the senses fail us, if we have not faculties of highef
power, to seize
this fleeting
Being.
THE World
riety of Things,
but
it
appears to resemble
ri
ylyovc,
ax.
r ro
'
Ix
^
A
&*&&
therefore
K,
6J
ovro?v tr^xs/^evoyj
TVifl^
a//,
may
from
hence.
part of
it
more ; a part of it is coming, and is of tliese is made that infinite Time, which
assumed stillfarther and farther.
ever to be
is
made
it
of Entity.
Natural. Ause. L.
IV.
c.
14.
M.
S.
Com.
in
Kicomach.
p. 10.
107
some moving
spectacle (such as a procession or a triumph) that abounds in every part with splendid objects, some of which are
departing, as fast as others make their appearance. The Senses look on,
still
*
much
Soul's superior powers. Having done this, they have done their duty, being
is
present and instantaneous. But to the Memory, to the Imagination, and above
the Intellect, the several Nows or Instants are not lost, as to the Senses,
all to
but are preserved and made objects of steady comprehension, however in their own nature they may be transitory and
passing.
"
from contemplating two or more of these Instants un" der one view, together with that In" terval of Continuity, which subsists " between them, that we acquire in"
,
"Now it is
sensibly
108
H.E'RM ES.
:
C.vn. "sensibly the Idea of TIME." For example The Sun rises ; this I remember ; it rises again ; this too I remember.
rat
/x
/K,<T
voy(ruiA.tv, -j
$vo
eiTFV)
-vj/y^
ra NYN, TO
>^
TTO
<^OC.{Jt.y
WOCl
XPONON.
If
we can
acquire a Sensation
But we
distinguish
the other ^
For
as often as
the
we
conceive the
Extremes
to be different
from Mean^ and the Soul talks of two Nows, one prior and the other subsequent , then it is we say there is TIME, and this it is we call TIME. Natural. Auscult. L. IV. c.
16.
Themistius's
Comment
ya.%
o
is
to the
o
same purpose.
VTTO
"Orxv
vvs
TW NTN,
svQvs
Tft/
%0f
rort
%f ovo>
TU
yo
VTTO -CTtfaT^v
ov
levo7<rV
Xsyeiv
w^wv, w Ixxa/Sfjta,
oiov
1| antti-
JFbr
when
'
the Mind,
it
another Now to-day t then it is it imday, talks again of has an idea of TIME, terminated by these two mediately
it is
enabled to
were
to sever
Line
by two Points.
Themist. Op.
45. b.
109
Yet
still
we
but a natural
Day ?
And what
is
that,
but pure Time ? It is after the same manner, by recognizing two new Moons, and the Extention between these two
:
vernal Equinoxes, and the Extention between these ; that we gain Ideas of other Times, such as Months and Years,
which are
all
so
;
many
that
is
Intervals, de-
scribed as above
to say, passing
AND
thus
it is
THE MIND
acquires
But this Time it the Idea of TIME. must be remembered is PAST TIME
ONLY, which is always the first Species,
that occurs t
the
human
intellect.
How
by
Anticipation.
Should
it
be
110
HERMES,
be demanded
still
VII.
farther,
And what
i$
answer, that in this Anticipation? case it is a .kind of reasoning by analogy from similar to similar ; from successions of events, that are past already, to similar successions, that are presumed
hereafter.
far
We
For example
observe as
can carry me, how every day has been succeeded by a night ; that night, by another day ;
back as
my memory
that day,
so
downwards in order to the Day that is now. Hence then I anticipate a similar succession from the present Day, and thus gain the Idea of days and nights in futurity. After the same manner, by
attending to the periodical returns of New and Full Moons of Springs, Sum;
Autumns and Winters, all of which in Time past I find never to have
mers,
failed, I anticipate
versified succession,
like orderly
and
di-
WE
go farther than
this,
Ill
-
but even
concern.
in matters of
human and c VI I:
For example
Having
how
and
we
anticipate future
health to those, who, being now sickly, and future sickness to use exercise
;
who, being now healthy, are slothful. It is a variety of such observations, all respecting one subject, which
those,
Man
of practical Wisdom.
If they
respect the human body (as above) they form the Physician ; if matters military,
Statesman
if
subjects. All these several characters in their respective ways may be said to
a kind of prophetic discernment, which not only presents them the barren prospect of futurity (a prospossess
pect not hid from the meanest of men) but she\vs withal those events, which
are
112
C. VII. are likely to
HERMES.
to
^*^~/ them
rectitude.
And hence
we may
it is,
that
(if
we
except those,
sistances)
diviner as-
justly say, as
was
said of old,
FROM
Cfl
So Milton,
To something
Et
Prudentiam
esse quodam*.
modo Divinationem.
Corn. Nep. in Vit. Attici. There is nothing appears so clearly an object of the MIND or INTELLECT only, as the Future does, since we
can find no place for its existence any where else. Not but the same, if we consider, is equally true of the Past.
For though it may have once had another kind of being, when (according to common Phrase) it actually was, yet was it then something Present^ and not something Past.
As
Past,
it
has
since
had
it
in fact
no existence but in THE MIND or MEMORY, any other, it could not properly be was
this
called Past.
It
intimate, connection
between
TIME, and the SOUL, that made some Philosophers doubt whether if there was no Soul, there could be any Time y
since
Time appears
fty
to have
its
>
tew -vxps ew
o PC?
'"
*;
ofBi*
ns,
K.
T. A.
113
it
FROM what
c VI1
-
does knowledge of
the
ledge of the Present, so that their Order to us is that of PRESENT, PAST, and
FUTURE.
Species of knowledge, that of the Present is the lowest, not only as first in perception, but as far the more
extensive, being necessarily
all
OF these
common
to
Zoophytes, as far as they possess Sensation. Knowledge of the Past comes next,
as being
Memory
as well as Senses.
Knowledge
of
who
r. A.
c.
20.
Thenmtius,
TO
El roivw
//,>
K,
a^0/xravroc
TO
av
TO dgiQpWTov ^Xoc^v)
OVTOS
0,1 o
TO
evs^ystot,
JE
tf>c
vTrordivi, {*
a,giQ[AV)<7ovros
cl>7,
^ri
^vnd^ft fx/nTe
fvepystoc, tpoivspov
us oyx
y^govos
I hem.
An. p^4.
114
C. VII.
Arist. de
II
RM ES>
last,
as being de-*
and which
is
An.
3. p.
ii.
2o
mos f excellent as well as the most rare, since Nature in her superadditions rises from worse always to
better,
and
is
better
down
to worse*.
AND now
is
first
;
in percep-
which first in dignity which more common, which more rare let us compare them both to the present Now or Instant, and examine what relations
;
it.
IN the
first
place there
maybe
Times
both past and future, in which the present Now has no existence, as for example in Yesterday, and To-morrow.
AGAIN,
belong
this
Chapter.
115
End
For
if it
were possible,
sent
let us
suppose
thejprc-
Now
included
within the limits of the past Time AD. In such case CD, part of the past Time
AD,
by the Hypothesis it ispa^, and so will be both Past and Future at once, which is absurd. In the same manner we
prove that C cannot be included within the limits of & future Time, such as BE.
WHAT
Times, as
then shall
this
we say of such
this
all
Day,
Month,
this
Year,
this
Century,
which include
Now
They
cannot
116
HERMES
cannot be past Times or future, from what has been proved and present Time
;
has no existence, as has been proved likewise*. Or shall we allow them to be present,
from
the present
;
Now, which
exists
within them
of that we
the shortest
among them
has infinite
parts always absent ? If so, and in conformity to custom we allow such Times
present, as present
Days, Months, Years, and Centuries, each must of necessity be a compound of the Past and the Future,
present
called
Now
or Instant,
while, that
and
for
jointly
PRESENT,
Now remains
exam-
within them.
f j
XABCDEY
*
Sup. p. 104,
let
117
;
and
let C.
VIL
the present Now or List ant exist at A. exists "within I say, in as much as
XY,
and
that therefore
A XA is
Time
past,
future, and the whole XA, AY, Time Present* The same holds, if we suppose the present Now to exist
AY
Time
at B, or C, or
D, or E, or any where
the
before Y.
exists at
When
present
Now
past,
Y, then is the whole XY Time and still more so, when the Now
In like manner
gets to g, or onwards.
Now
it
Now
When
it
had past
that,
then
thus
XY
it is
bethat
And
in Space.
once y
113
C. VII.
HERMES.
once, while
sion its
FROM what
perceive that
may
deno-
mination
fs)
ate or immediate.
PLACE, according to the antients, was either mediI am (for example) in Europe, be-
cause I
am
in
England;
house
shire-; in Wiltshire,
because in Salisbury
;
in Salisbury^
because in
my own
Bound of that
TS
vrt^ii^ovros
Now
as this
all
imme-
diate Place
is
the former
Places,
it is
from
mediate Places
them
my
among them so far exceed my magnitude. To apply this to TIME. The Present Century is present in the Year ; that, in the present Month ; that, in the present
present
Day;
that,
It
in the present
is
Hour ;
that, in the
present Minute.
circumscription that we arrive at THAT REAL AND INDIVISIBLE INSTANT, which by being itself the very Essence
all. even
the
largest
119
-
divisible
And
so
much
TIME,
from the above doctrine of
Now
THE TENSES
sent,
are used to
mark Preeither
Past,
indefinitely
reference to any
Beginning,
largest of Times,
to include it within
Nicephorus Blemmides
'EKJ-^
v
speaks
o
much
%f<W
I$-<v
Jp*
Ix (tsgtKof,
^ ^a
PRESENT TlME thertfore ytflvtctaiv, teyopsvos % is that which adjoins to the REAL Now or INSTANT on
avlos.
NTN
a limited Time made up of Past and REAL Now said to its vicinity to that
'Ew/J. <pvo-<x>j*
be
K*$.
B'.
See also
Phi/sic,
2, 3,
fy
120
C, VII.
HERMES.
Beginning, Middle, or
definitely, in
End
or
tions.
Future.
three,
to
denote
and three
to denote their
Ends ;
in all
NINEfirst
THE
three
of these Tfenses
we
the Inceptive Present, the Inceptive Past, and the Inceptive Future:
The
Middle Present* the Middle Past, and the Middle Futhree next, the
ture.
And
the three
last,
the Comple-
AND
thus
it is,
that the
TENSES
in
their natural
TWELVE
and
three to denote
it
Time
its
absolute,
c Vlr
-
nine to denote
under
respective
distinctions.
Scribo.
I write,
Scripsi.
I wrote.
am
going to write.
Middle
sum.
I
or extended Present.
Tvyxdvu yqdQw.
Scribo or Scribens
am
writing.
Inceptive Past.
(pLv.
Scripturas eram.
beginning
to. write.
Middle
122
c. VII.
HERMES.
Middle or extended Past.
E'vp^uDov
or Tu y'x#i/0i/
(
<yp&u)&v.
Scribf***
bam.
was
writing.
Completive Past.
'Eyyf#<p*i/.
Scripseram.
had done
writing.
Inceptive Future.
MeXXvj<70 y^(pii/.
Scripturus ero.
shall
y
E(70(ju#;
Scvibzns ero.
I shall
be
writing.
Completive Future.
3/
E0-c[jun yzyQadpvg.
Scripsero.
I shall,
fares.
\vitlx
123
much must be
all
in
defiance of
analogy,
to
not however be improper to inquire, what traces may be discovered in favour of this system, either in lan-
IT
may
guages themselves, or in those authors who have written upon this part of
Grammar,
and
reason of things.
IN the
Aorists
place, as to
went
; eweo-ov,
hear of them in the Future, and more Yet it seems rarely still in the Present.
agreeable to reason, that wherever Time
is
signified without
THUS
124
H E R M E S.
THUS
Milton,
WALK
the
when Adam
take any instant whatever. So when the same author calls Hypocrisy,
the only Evil, that
Invisible* except to
WALKS
alone,
God
The same
may be
Ad
cito qui
Avarus,
cum
moritur,
nil
recte.
TACIT,
125
so
Tenses
are
many C
VIL
likewise
AORISTS op
Tu
nihil
ADMITTES
in
te,
formidine
pcence.
Hor.
So too
SHALT
&c, for
this
ture W.
Latin Tongue appears to be more than ordiIt has narily deficient, as to the article of Aorists. no peculiar form even for an Aorist of the Pasty and
therefore (as Prisdan
tells
W The
is
forced
to do the double duty both of that Aorist, and of thfc perfect Present , its application in particular instances
Thus
it
is
that FECI means (as the same author informs us) both
and
ivofixroe,
/ have done
ity
and / did
it /
VIM
both
HERMES.
WE
pass from Aorists, to
THE IN*
CEPTIVE TENSES*
THESE may be found in part supplied (like many other Tenses) by verbs MEAAQ yjakpeiv. auxiliar. Scripturus SUM. I AM GOING to write. But the
Latins go farther, and have a species of Verbs, derived from others, which do
the duty of these Tenses, and are themselves for that reason called Inchoatives or Inceptives.
leo>
I begin
to
grow warm
choative
There
both
once.
I^XKOC,
and
JSov,
it,
and / saw
838.
it
Prise.
Gram. L. VIII.
814,
Edit.
Putsch.
127
they are not strictly Inin Greek and Latin ceptives, yet both have a near affinity with them. Such
lives,
which
if
are
to
-TroXffju^f/o?,
;
Bellaturio,
tyae-eio,
have a desire
make war
Esurio,
for
eat(V.
And
so
much
TIVE TENSES.
THE two
last orders
of Tenses which
called
we
THE*
MIDDLE TENSES
As
all
is
fu-
ture, hence
properly these Verbs are formed, the Greek ones from a future Verb, the Latin from
see
we
how
From ByoAe^wrw and fyua-u come Participle. ToAi^r*/w and 'fyvariu; from Bellaturus and Esurus come Bellaturio and Esurio. See Macrobius, p. 691.
a future Ed. Var.
.
Plato in Phaedone.
12S
c. vii.
HERMES/
or
COMPLETIVE, which
express
its
Completion or 'End*
and explained and confirmed by Dr. Samuel Clarke, in his rational edition of
ly,
Homer-' s Iliad.
Nay, long before either ofthese, we find the same scheme in Sea(0 ascribed to liger, and by him -f-Grocinus as its author. The learned Gaza
9
(who
(*>
Ex his pcrdpimus
ra
nos.,
Imperfectum
PrceteritumperRecte sane. Et Prcesens imperfect* fectum^ Amaveram. um y Amo. Recte hactenus ; continuat enim amorem 9
sic,
Amabam
neque absolvit. At Prcesens perfectum, Amavi : quis hoc dicat ? DC Futuro autem ut non male sentit^ ita contra*versum
Futurum, inquit^ imperfectum^ Amabo : Amavero. Non male, inquam : significat enim Perfectum,
est.
fy
absolutumiri:
Amabo perc.
De
Cau5. Ling.
La t.
115.
t His name was William Grocin^ an Englishman, contemporary with Erasmus^ and celebrated for his learning.
He went
and
was Professor
at Oxford.
129
same mannerW.
What
same
PRESENT TENSE
his excellent
Grammar) denotes
Instant
TI,
artXls, that
which
is
now
wa^eXgAySw
KJ
and incomplete ; THE PERFECTUM, TO Ivls^ss ru Iyer uros, that which is now im-
THE
the extended
xr^Xh T -Eja^^/^e'va, IMPERFECTUM, and incomplete part of the Past; and THE
TO ^ac^^^vQos -craAa/, T x^ evr&bs
is
PLUSQUAM-PERFECTUM,
y^
axe//*e'v8,
that which
is
the
com-
o Hencewe are per-cjiX^ax//x,vof, T^V ye IAV\I> SVSTUO-XV suaded that the Perfectum doth not signify the completion of the Past) but PRESENT COMPLETION. Apollon. L. III.
c. 6.
to this opinion,
was the application and use of the Particle <v, of which he was then treating, and which, as it denoted Potentiality
or Contingence, would assort (he says) with any of the passing, extended, and incomplete Tenses, but never
with
this
PEREECTUM, because
indefeasible existence,
this implied
such a com-
plete and
as never to be qualified!
130
HERMES.
same doctrine from the
authority
rest,
VII.
Stoics,
whose
all
the
not only from the more early age when they lived, but from their supePhilosophy, and their pecuattachment to Dialectic, which na-
rior skill in
liar
turally led
them
to great accuracy in
BEFORE
these Philosophers the vulgar present. Tense was called THE IMPERFECT PRESENT, and the vulgar Prceteri-
C)
By
tum, THE PERFECT PRESENT, than which nothing can be more consonant to the system that we favour. But let us hear Priscian, from whom we learn these facts.
-
PR^ESENS TEMPUS proprie dicitur, cvjus pars jam prceteriit, parsfutura est. Cum enim Tempus^ fluvii more, instabili
volvatur cursu, vix punctum habere potest in prcesenti, hoc Maxima igitur pars zjus (sicut dictum est, in mstanti.
est) vel prceteriit vel futura est.
deest
autem sequens, id
est,
futura.
Ut
si in
media versu
dicam scribo versum, priore ejus parte scripta ; cut adhue deest extremapars, prcesenti utor verbo, dicendoj scri-
bo versum
sui,
sed IMPERFECTUM
est,
quod
quod scribatur
Ex eodem
Si cnim adjinem perveniat inceptum, statim utimur PR^ETERITO PERFECTO ; continue vnim, scripta
etiam Pcrfectum.
ad
131
-
BEFORE we
be more easily intelligible from the hypothesis here advanced, and serve
will
withal to confirm
its
truth.
AND
first,
teritum Perfectum in
some instances
af-
ter a very peculiar manner, so as to imthe very reverse of the verb in its na-
ply
NOT, is NO MORE, It was in this sense that Cicero addressed the people of Rome, when he had put to death the leaders in the Catalmarian Conspiracy.
is
He
ad finem verm, dico, scrips! versum. And soon after sciendum speaking of the Latin Perfectum, he says Romani PRATER IT o PERFECTO nonsolum tamen, quod
in re
apud Grcecos vatgeHuIptws vocotur, quern STOICI ' ENESTnTA nomtnctverunt) sed etiam pro
&c.
Lib. VIII. p. 812, 813, 814.
TEAEION
132
C. VII.
HERMES.
out with a loud voice,
*VIXERUNT.
So VIRGIL,
-
ty
./En. II.
And
* So among the Romans, when in a Cause all the Pleaders had spoken, the Cryer used to proclaim DIXERUNT,
i.
e.
Ascon. Paed. in
Verr. II.
evil
Sed tu,jam
mitis, Apollo,
Let
these Events
HAVE BEEN
in days of old ;
let
by Impli-
cation therefore
But HENCEFORTH
them be no more.
So Eneas
Hac Trojana
and
tenus fueYitfortunasecuto*
Let Trojan Fortune (that is, adverse, like that of Troy, its inhabitants,) HAVE so far FOLLOWED us. By imtherefore, but let it follow us no farther, Here plication
let it end,
Hie
sit
place.
force of
In which instances, by the way, mark not only the the. Tense, but of the Mood, the PRECATIVE Or
in
IMPERATIVE, not
p. 154, 155, 156.
See
BOOK THE
FIRST.'
c
-
133
And
again,
'
^En. VII.
is
THE
derived from
of the Tense here mentioned. We see that the periods of Nature, and of hu-
man
affairs,
are maintained
by the
reci-
It
is
with
Adversity with Glory and Ignominy ; with Life and Death. Hence then* in
the instances above, the completion of one contrary is put for the commence-
HATH
MORE.
K3
* Certus
in hospittbus
IT
amor ; err at, ut
non
est
ipsi:
Cumque
32
134
C. VII.
.HERMES.
IT
is
remarkable in *
Virgil, that
he
frequently joins in the same sentence this complete and perfect Present with
the extended and passing Present ; which proves that he considered the two, as belonging to the same species of Time,
co-in*
G.
Terra tremit ; fugere/em
Prcesertim
si
I.
G.
Incubuit,
ventus.
G.
II.
Ad
terram fugit,
alto.
fy
portu
se
condidit
./En.
V.
IN
* See
C.
also Spenser's Fairy Queen,
B.
I.
a 3. St.
19.
3. St. 39.
C. 8.
St. 9.
He
sing.
Inruerant Danai,
tenebant.
tectum omne
n. II.
Tres imbris torti radios, ires nubis aquosa, Addiderant rutiU tres ignis, $ alitis
austri.
Fulgores nunc
terrificos,
sonitumque me-
irW.
JEu. VIII.
K4
& The intention of
Virgil
As
may be
better
is
>*ow COXT*ACTI>-G
BATH ALREADY LEFT tkec mOTC than * JUS* The Poet, from a high strain of poetic
tion, supposes the scorpion so desirous
of
guftus among
136
c. Vir.
'
HERMES.
As to the IM PERFECTUM, it is some-* "^ times employed to denote what is usual and customary. Thus surgebat and scribebat signify not only, he WAS rising, he
WAS
writing,
signify, write.
he
USED
he
is,
USED
to
Th^
reason-of this
that what-
ever
is
must
and thus we
fall
TENSE
here mentioned.
AGAIN,
to be
acts,
one perfect, the other pending, and hence the use of the two different Tenses. Some editions read relinquit; but
reliqnit has the authority of the celebrated
Mcdicean ma-
nuscript.
Ilia noto citius, volucrique sagitta,
Ad terram
The
ship, quicker
fugit, fy
portu se condidit
alto.
TINUES FLYING
bour.
to land,
than the wind, or a swift arrow, CON<md is HID within the lofty har(like many others)
Hence the
who
137
confirmed by
many
when
still
their works, they fixed their names to did \tpendenti titulo, in a suspensive kind
for that of Inscription, and employed It here mentioned. purpose the Tense Howas 'AwgXXvfe gWe*,
Apellesfaciebat,
XvxXfjT^ eWa, Polydetm faciebat, and never evohre or fecit. By this they imagined that they avoided the shew of arrogance, and had in case of censure an
were) prepared, since it appeared from the work itself, that it was once indeed in hand, but no pretension that it was ever finished^ ^. IT
apology
(as it
still
within.
Inruerant Danai^
TJie
fy
tectum
omne tenebant.
POSSES-
Greeks
HAD ENTERED
;
and
WERE THEN
as
much
I.
as to say, they
had en-
Plin.
Nat. Hist. L.
The
first
Printers
(who
antient
138
c. Vii.
HERMES.
IT
is
which the Latins derive these Tenses frorft one another, shews a plain
ner, in
reference to the system here advanced* From the passing Present come the pasScribo, Scribe* sing Past, and Future. bam, Scribam. From the perfect Present
come
come come
Fere*
Tule*
ram and
Tulero.
We shall conclude
the
by observing, that
of the Tenses, as they stand ranged by the old Grammarians, is not a fortuitous Order, but is consonant to our perceptions, in the recognition of
ORDER
phanie.
Excudebat
Gruil.
Morelius*
Demosthenes.
139
AND
ties there
which denote Time indefinitely ; and what for those Tenses, opposed to Aorists, which mark it definitely, (such as the Inceptive, the Middle, and the
Completive) we here finish the subject of TIME and TENSES, and proceed to
consider
CHAP.
<r>
Scaliger's
elegant.
Ordo autem
(Temporum
Quod
enimprceteriit, prius
quam quod
itaqueprimo loco
pore offertur
nolris,
quamobrem Prcesens Tempus primum locum occupavit ; est enim commune omnibus animalibus. Prceteritum au~
tern
Futurum ve-
rb etiam pautiotibus, quippe quibus datum est prudential DeCaus. Ling. Lat. c. 113. See also Senecx offictum.
Epist. 124.
iia ;
Mutum
140
HERMES.
CHAP,
VIII.
Concerning Modes*
C. VIII.
WE
have
observed already
W that
the Soul's leading powers are those of Perception and those of Volition, which
words we have taken in their most comprehensive acceptation. We have observed also, that
is
all
Speech or Discourse
or a certain Volition.
cording as
we
exhibit
either in a dif-
ferent part, or after a different manner, hence I say the variety of MODES or
MOODS.
(fl)
*)
frine.
Gaza
defines a
Mode
He
says
it is
/SsX^/xa, I/F
or Affection of the Soul, sig* .?AMW <np.*n&iMm,a Volition Gram. or Sound articulate. nijicd through, some Voice
L. IV.
As
therefore this
to Verbs,
is
Modes belong
hence
Apottonius observes
141
VIII.
Perception or Volition it is equally the same) this constitutes that Mode called
the
DECLARATIVE
or
INDICATIVE,
A
Nosco
Perception,
crines,
incanaque menta
-^-
Regis Ramani
Virg.'^En. VI.
A Volition.
In floivzFERT
formas
Corpora.
ANIMUS
mutatas dicere
Ovid.
Metam.
I.
IF
we do not
strictly assert,
as of
something absolute and certain, but as of something possible only, and in the
number of Contingents, this makes that Mode, which Grammarians call the POTEN-
fs
the
Soul's disposition
is in c.
De
Synt. L. III.
an eminent degree attached to Verbs. 13. Thus top Prisdan: Modi sunt
142
HERMES.
such occasions the leading
sentence.
Mode
of the
Sed
tacitus pasci
si
possciCorvu*,
HA-
BERET
Plus dapis, &c.
Hor.
sometimes it is not the leading Mode, but only subjoined to the IndicaIn such case, it is mostly used to tive. denote the End, or final Cause which
;
YET
End,
happen
Mode
here mentioned.
For example,
may
cut
mens
throats.
HERE
Mode
143
Mode; but
as to their
End
of their rising, it is still but a Contingent, that may never perhaps happen.
This Mode, as often as it is in this manner subjoined, is called by Grammarians not the Potential, but the SUBJUNC-
TIVE.
so happens, in the constitution of human affairs, that it is hot alit
BUT
ways
sufficient
merely
to declare
our-
selves to others.
We
more
Hence then new Modes of speaking if we interrogate, it is the INTERROGATIVE MODE if we Even require, it is the REQUISITIVE.
;
the Requisitive itself hath its subordinate Species : With respect to inferiors, it is
an IMPERATIVE
MODE;
with respect
to
144
C.Vlli. to
HER M E
equals and superiors,
or
S.
it is
^*~^
aPRECA-
TJVE
OPTATIVE.*
we established a variety of Modes the INDICATIVE or DECLARATIVE, to assert what we think certain; the POTENTIAL, for the Purposes of whatever we think Contingent; THE INTERROGATIVE, when we are doubtful^ to procure us Information ; and THE REthus have
;
AND
Qt^isiTiVE,
tion
of our
is
Volitions.
As
*
It
gave
in
rise to a
Sophism of Protagoras.
Iliad
Homer
(says he)
beginning
When
is
with
the
oio/xsvoj, iTr/Tarls/.
19.
The
solution
Gram-
The
Species of
Modes
in great
measure depend on
The
num-
Besides
mentioned in Chapter
II.
145
these several
Modes C
have
certain
VIII.
many more,
p. 4. patetics
as
may be
seen in
Ammonius de
Interpret.
The
Peri-
seems too with reason) considered all these additional Sentences as included within those,
fand
it
which they themselves acknowledged, and which they made to be five in number, the Vocative, the Imperative,
There
the Interrogative, the Precative, and the Assertive. is no mention of a Potential Sentence, which may
be supposed
tive.
to
The Vocative, f which the Peripatetics called the more properly 'crgoo'otyognrt-
xovj was nothing moi;e than the Form of address in point of names, titles, and epithets, with which we apply ourselves one to another. As therefore it seldom included
any Verb within it, it could hardly contribute to form a verbal Mode. Ammonius and Boelhius, the one a Greek
Peripatetic, the other a Latin^ have illustrated the Species
of Sentences from
Homer and
Virgil.,
manner.
KAHTIKOT,
us
TV nPO2TAK.TIK.OT, us
9i, *Igi
rxyslx.-
TO,
146
C. vill
HERMES.
certain
marks or
signs of them
been
in-
may
be
xj
rS
'EPHTHMATIKOY,
T/V,
-5700E)/
*V
av^jDv ;
TO,
us TO,
^
x}
rS 'EYKTIKOT, wf
*A/ </#
Itri
\
ZEU TE OTaTf^
<
rurois, T ~ ~
'AnO4>ANTIKOT, x9*
/
TE izavrtz ftratarn
<$
Perfectarum vero
ut^
ullis^
-cyavTos-,
&c.
TO iTf/ Ef/A. p. 4.
Boetkius's
Account
is
as follows.
:
DEPRECATIVA,
Da
IMPERATIVA,
ut,
fy
labcre pennis.
INTERROGATIVA,
ut>
--
Pater y
KNUNTIATIVAJ
in
147
-
be enabled by our discourse to signify c vni them, one to another. And hence those various MODES or MOODS, of which we find in common Grammars so prolix a
detail,
in fact
no more
than " so
"
may be found,
still
as follows,
THE PRECATIVE,
Universal Lord! be bounteous
To
give us only
Good
mightiest y in
tliy
Father's might.
THE INTERROGATIVE,
Whence and what art
thou, execrable Shape ?
THE VOCATIVE,
Adam, earth's halloed Mcldy Of God inspired
THE
ASSERTIVE or ENUNCIATIVE,
also
The conquered
lose*
of
all
148
t
H E R M E S.
'
"*
C. vni.
ALL
these
MODES
have
this in
comthe
all distinctions
of
Time
likewise,
by an adequate number
These Variations
may be found, some at the beginning of the Verb, others at its ending, and consist for the most part either in
multiplying or diminishing the number of Syllables, or else in lengthening or shortening their respective Quantities,
which two methods are called by Grammarians The Latin, w hich is but
manner a
chiefly to
a species of Greek somewhat debased, admits in like large portion of those variations, which are
be found
at the
so far
Ending of Yet in
its
which have
necessitated
still,
all
fewer of those Variations, have been of them to assume two Auxiliars at least,
that
is
to say, those
which express
in
As
as to admit
no Variation for
for
from Give 9 Gave ; from Speak y Spake, &c. Time, and Modes, we are compelled to employ no less than seven Auxiliars, viz. Do, Am,
Wrote
Hence
to express
Marc, Shall, Will, May, and Can; which we use sometime* singly, as
when we
say, I
am
149
Their
in
C.
SOUL and
its
AFFECTIONS.
vm.
Peculiarities
part, as follows.
TI VE MODES
two former
IF
it is
always necessary.
Peculiarities.
The
sometimes two together, as I have been writing, I should have written ; sometimes no less than three, as I
ten
;
lost,
all
he could have been preserved. But other speculations, relative to the Ge-
nius of the English Language, we refer the reader, who wishes for the most authentic information, to that excellent Treatise
sJiort
intitled,
Introduction to English
Grammar.
150
C.
HERME
The Return
times
S.
Vin.
to the Requisitive is
some-
made
To
a prima
Insidias
Dandum
ifi
But with
the
Word$ alone, in Words, which are called a Response or Answer, and which are always
necessarily
Return
made
in
actually or
tive
Sentence
Was
is
a Sentence
AND
hence
(if
we may be permitted
perceive the near
affinity
to digress)
we may
151
of
this Interrogative
Mode
with
Response So near inor Return is deed is this Affinity, that in these two Modes alone the Verb retains the same
mostly made.
are they otherwise distinguished, than either by the Addition or Absence of some small particle, or by
its
in the collocation
Tone, or Accent^.
BUT
rx
^titrac.
x.oc.Xt'io-Btx.i
Se
tys
TO tlvat
Indicative
Mode, of which
its
it
zee
Assertion^ which by
nature
name
of Indicative
when
returns
again to its proper Character. Apoll. de Synt. L. III. c. 21. Theodore Gaza says the same, Introd. Gram.
L. IV.
C/)
It
may be
Re-
sponse
may
152
C. VIII.
HERMES.
comparison he^ t \yeen the Interrogative Mode and the
Requisitive.
BUT
to return to our
THE
ac-
is
For ex-Tliese
?
ample
Are
these Verses of
Homer
Response
Verses are of
Homer.
Are
Response
Those are not Verses of Virgil. And here the Artists of Language, for the sake of brevity and
dispatch, have provided
two
all
Particles,
to represent all
;
YES, for
the affirmative
No,
for all
But when the Interrogation is complex^ as when we say Are these Verses of Homer, or of Virgil ? much more, when it is indefinite^ as when we say in general Whose
are these Verses?
We
The Reason
is 9
that no In-
terrogation can be answered by a simple Yes, or a simple No, except only those, which are themselves so simple, as of
two
Now
An-
swers,
two
affirmative,
two
more.
subsist
The
reason
of less
may
153
Ian-
THE INTERROGATIVE
(in the
may be
instance
For
Are
these Verses
They are
gations go
Virgil's
(4.)
Virgil's
we may
The
indefinite Interro-
farther
for these
may be answered by
For
instance
affirma-
infinite affirmatives,
and
infinite negatives.
Whose are
these Verses?
We
may answer
tively They are Virgil's, TJiey are Horace's, They are or negatively Ovid's, Sfc. They are not Virgil's, They
way,
to infinity.
They are not Ovid's, and so on, either How then should we learn from a sin-
Possibles
Yet even
Answer only
retrenching
by an
is
which
Thus when supply from himself. Hoic many right angles equal the angles of a triangle ?^-\VQ answer in the short monosyllable, Two ; whereas, without the Ellipsis, the answer would have
terrogator
left to
we
axe askecj
been
T&o
The
154
-
II
ER
M E S.
first
Person of
the singular, and that from this plain reason, that it is equally absurd in
Modes for a person to request or give commands to himself, as it is in Pronouns^ for the speaker to become the subject of his own address**
AGAIN, we may
interrogate as to all
Who WAS Founder of Rome? Who is King of China ? Who WILL DISCOVER
the
Longitude ?
Commanding
But
The Ancients
distinguished these
two Species of
Intercalled
Ammonius
160.
IX.
2.
* Sup.
p. 74, 75,
155
C. VIII.
all
<& Apollonius's Account of the Future, implied in Imperatives, is worth observing. *ETT/ ya^> //,>J y;vo/xlvj
vo/j
py
yeyovoVrfv ^
I1PO2TASIL*
<$e
roi ^e
//.) ytvofAtvoc,
v)
py
ye-
yovorx,
If/.
iTeiry^eiorytrac.
s^ovrcx, sir
TO
ea-Eo-Qtxi,
MEAAONTOS
Co M M A N D
are not doing, or have not yet been done. But those things, which being not now doing, or having not yet been
dene, have a natural aptitude to exist hereafter,
THE FUTURE.
"
may be De Syn-
L.
I. c.
36.
Soon before
this
he says
Awon/roc, ra,
iv
to-u
Is-i
TO,
*O
TYPANNOKTONH2A2 TIMA20O,
rrtv
rw,
TIMH0HIETAI, xara
TIVES have a
%fov TO
Evvo/av'
rv>
IxxX/Vci S;>jXXa-
Se
o^/f/xo'v.
All
IMPERA-
THE
same
FUTURE
TIME,
it is
the
thing to say,
LET HIM, THAT KILLS A TYRANT, BE HONOURED, Or, HE, THAT KILLS ONE, SHALL BE
HONOURED ;
much as one
Declarative.
is
Mode,
in as
IMPERATIVE,
A poll,
de Syntaxi, L.
35.
Priscian
seems to allow Imperatives a share of Present Time, as well as Future. But if we attend, we shall find his Present
156
C. Vlll.
1
HERMES.
present or the past, the, natures of which
are
IT
posed
<$
Futurum
[_Tempus~\
naturali
quadam
necessitate vide-
Ea
futuTo.
It
tain
is
Tenses of the Past, such as those of the Perfectum, and of the two Aorists. But then these Tenses, when
so applied, either totally lose their temporary Character,
or else are used to insinuate such a Speed of execution^ it were) done in the very when commanded. The same difference seems to instant
subsist
between our English Imperative, BE GONE, and The first (if we those others of, Go, or BE GOING.
please)
may be
:
stiled
Commands
the others
may be
Imperatives of the
first,
and
It
is
thus Apolfonim,
in the
Chapter
tinguishes between
a-tcavlersj
The
157
-
from
this
Vlllj
and that
any one. You SHALL DO THIS, has often the same force with
to say to
the Imperative,
So in the Decalogue THOU SHALT NOT KILL THOU' SHALT NOT BEAR FALSE WITNESS
THIS.
Do
The
first is
spoken
(as
he
calls it)
cfi
its
tyagairaeii,
of Extension,
second,
J*
or allowance
Time for
the
tion.
a view to immediate Compleanother place, explaining the difference between the same Tenses, Sxawle- and 2x\J/o, he says of
vwreteiuo-tv, with
And
in
the
last,
/uo'vov
TO
(A-n
ytvofAtvov txgo<rrK(r(ri,
aA^Jt
TO y<vo-
not only commands fcevov f> vjxgaToio-ei dlvraiyogevei, something which has not been yet done y but forbids also
that
it
that, which is
now doing
in
an Extension, that
is to
say, in
a slow and lengthened progress. Hence, if a man has been a long while writing, and we are willing to hasten
him,
it
(for that he
would be wrong to say in Greek) rPA$E, WRITE is nozs? 9 and has been long doing) but rPAON,
;
MAKE NO DELAYS.
See
24.
See also Macrobius de Diff. Verb. Edit. Varior. Latini non xslima-
158
C.Vlll.
HERMES
WITNESS
the
^^
Commands.
As
to the
POTENTIAL MODE,
it is
by
its
It is
may
be, or,
This
But
to
to
if it
be
said,
Do
this,
this be
square the Circle, we cannot say in either case, it is true or it is false, though
the Question are Yet still the about things impossible. Potential does not aspire to the Indica-
the
Command and
tive,
because
of
BOOK:
THE FIRST.
is
159
of the Indicative
out reserve.
absolute,
and with-
C.Vilt
THIS
mean)
truly
Grammars
first
the
first
in order, so
is
both in dignity and use. It is this, which publishes our sublimest perceptions which exhibits the Soul
;
minutest distinctions
is
which, in
its
employed by
forewarn us, as to that which is coming ; but above all in its Present Tense serves
Philosophy and the Sciences, by just Demonstrations to establish necessary Truth T H AT TR UT ii, which from its na;
which
knows
160
C. VIII.
HERMES.
knows no
distinctions either of Past or
is
of Future, but
al-
THROUGH
f h ->
Cum
See the quotation. Note () Chapter the Sixth. enim dicimus^ DEUS EST, non eum dicimus nunc ess&)
by
birth a
;
Rowan
of the
first
quality;
by
religion,
Christian
tetic
;
and by philosophy, a Platonic and Peripawhich two Sects, as they sprang from the same
commonly
adopted by the same Persons, such as Themutius, PorThere were phyry, lamblickus^ Ammonias, and others.
no
on the
in
distinction
in
The Doctrine
it is
these that
may
U THE a
Ci
THINGS,
THAT EXIST
IN
whose
Existence Time
can measure.
tJlOSG
their
Existence may be measured by Time, then there " may be assumed a Time greater than the Existence " of any one of them, as there may be assumed a u number greater than the greatest multitude, that is "
capable
H
C.
161
THROUGH all
vm.
con-
cc
C4
And
hence
it
is
that
<c
<c
things temporary have their Existence, as it were /e mited by Time ; that they are confined within it, as
"
*<
some degree or other they all submit to its power, according to those common Phrases, that Time is a destroyer; that things dewithin some bound
;
and that
in
" "
cc
that
men forget
in Time,
and
lose
"
and seldom that they improve, or grow The truth indeed is, lime always or beautiful. young, attends Motion. Now the natural effect of Motion is
put something^ which now is, out of that state, in it now is, and so far therefore to destroy that
"
66
to
which
state.
"
" The
reverse of
all this
THAT EXIST
ETERNALLY.
is
These
exist not in
to
that no
not surpass.
"none
of
obnoxious either to
u damage
or dissolution.
instant, as
Stonehenge
u u
and the Pyramids. It is likewise true at this instant, that the Diameter of the square is commensurable with
its side.
What
then shall
we
say-?
Was
there ever a
Time
162
C. VIII.
II
ER
M E S.
if
SUBSTANCE.
or,
Thus
we
make
;
Cicero went
whither goeth the Wind ? Go ! Thou Traitor ! But there is a Mode or Form, under
which Verbs sometimes appear, where they have no reference at all to Persons or Substances. For example To eat is
pleasant
;
" Time, when it was not incommensurable, as it is cer" tain there was a Time, when there was no Stonehenge, " or Pyramids ? or is it daily growing less incommcn" surable^ as we are assured of Decays in both those
1
'
From
we may
Region
to the unceasing
full,
knowing no
L. IV.
c.
remissions, languors,
Du
Edit.
The
o ^l
following
Passage
To
may
deserve Attention.
o (j.lv vot7v 'GrityvKtv,
ya.%
Noy
py
vouv*
(A.VI
ts^ovvris
a,vr> TO
v</fc
usi
vy <&uvrx, xj <*/*.
Max. Tyr.
f-,nd.
16$
Here pleasant ; but to fast is wholesome. the Verbs Toeaf,and, To fast, stand alone
b}^ themselves,
C. VIII.
nor
is it
requisite or even
.or
Sub-
modern
Grammarians have
this
Mode, from this their indefinite nature, INFINITIVES. Sanctius has given them the name of Impersonals ; and the
Greeks that of 'A-Taff'^*^ from the same reason of their not discovering either Person or
Number.
THESE INFINITIVES go farther. They not only lay aside the character of
but they also assume that of Substantives, and as such themselves
Attributives,
become
Pleasant
is
Infinitive;,
bute attending the Infinitive, To Fast. Examples in Greek and Latin of like kind are innumerable.
M2
iTY
Duke
164
C. VIII.
HER1V1ES.
Dulce
fy
decorum
est
pro patria
MORI
SCIRE
tuum-nihil est
Y#P $WOV.
Oil KOtT&OLVetv
THE
Stoics in their
00 It
is
nature of a
Noun
Gramma-
^//.ar/xov, A VERBAL THE VERB'S NOUN. f^xros, ; The Reason of this Appellation is in Greek more evident,
sometimes "Ovo^a
NOUN
from
sometimes
"0vo//,o.
its
it
in all
cases /
Thus Spenser,
For
not to have been dipt in Lethe lake,
-
rS
Saverv.
He
did
it,
to
be
rich,
FOR.
saiil ?
we had
rS XE-
r5
-cjAsrsrv, EVZKOI
2 tf?
Even when we speak in French, pour s'enricher. such Sentences, as the following, 1 choose TO PHILOSO, wt PHISE, rather than TO BE RICH, TO qiXovofyw /3Ao/xa;,
yATfrv, the Infinitives are in
nature as
much Accusatfian
tive*, us if
we were
to say, / choose
PHILOSOPHY rather
165
C. VIII.
PHMA
they denied to all the other Modes. Their reasoning was, they considered the true verbal character to be contained
.
simple
Infinitive only.
Thus the Infinitives n^iTr^'mV, Ambitlare^ To walk, mean simply that energy, and nothing more. The other Modes,
besides expressing this energy, superadd
which respect persons and circumstances. Thus Ambulo and Ambula mean not simply To ,walk 9 but mean, I walk, and, Walk Thou. And hence
certain Affections,
/3'Ao/x,a*, JJTTE^
CURSUS;
Sf
SCRIBERE, ScRIPTURA
8f
<Sf
LEGERE, LECTIO.
Itaque frequenter
)
Nominibus adjunguntur^
;
$ aliis casua-
more Nominum
id Persius^
Sedpulcrum
And
p.
1
soon after
I.EUERE, ni-
L.
XVIII.
130.
To
^1
See also ApolL L. I. c. 8. Gaza Gram. L. IV. if p-n^se-fbs v., r. K. oLTr&gliAfyxroVj 6iQf*
MS
166
.
HERMES.
hence they are
all
viii.
of them resolvable
into the Infinitive, as their Prototype, together with some sentence or word, expressive of their proper Character.
bulo,
Am-
me ambulare, I declare myself to walk. Ambula, Walk Thou; that is, Imperote ambulare, I command thee to walk; and so with the Modes of every other species. Take away therefore the Assertion, the Com;
I walk
this
is,
Indico
mand, or whatever else gives a Character to any one of these Modes, and there remains nothing more than THE MERE
INFINITIVE, which
significat
ipsam
rein,
quam
continet Ver-
THE
(
k)
oiito
TWOS
KaQo'Aa taav Sec Apollon. L. III. 13. x. r. A. See also Gaza,, in the note before,
/g-/T
(idest, A o-
mmis, quod
significat
;
possumiis dignotcere
facit
alios verbi
motus.
omncs modi
in hunc, id
Pmc.
L. XVIII.
p.
1131.
From
generate.
1C?
is
THE
with
somewhat singular.
all
It naturally coalesces
those Verbs that denote any Tenclence, Desire, or Volition of the SouL but not readily with others. Thus it is
sense as well as syntax, to say
fisXc^ai,
I desire to live ; say 'Ej-Q/w &v, Edo vivere, or even in English, I eat to live, unless by an Ellipsis, instead of I eat for to live ; as we say Vx# T $jV, or pour vivre. The reason
Cupio
vivere,
that though different Actions may unite in the same Subject, and therefore
is,
be coupled together (as when we say, He walked and discoursed) yet the
Actions notwithstanding remain separate and' distinct. But it is not so with
Here respect to Volitions, and Actions. the coalescence is often so intimate, that
the Volition
is
unintelligible,
till
the.
Action be exprest.
ro
desire,
I am
I want
What ?
fective
The
sentences,
we
and imperfect. We must help them then by Infinitives, which express 4 the
168
C.
HER
M E S.
live,
VIIL the proper actions to which they tenet Cupio legere, Volo discere, Desidero vi~>
dere*
I desire
to read,
I want
to see.
ren-
AND
several
so
much
for
MODES, and
their
SPECIES. We are to attempt to 'denominate them according to their most eminent characters it may be done As every nein the following manner. cessary truth, and every demonstrative syllogism (which last is no more than a combination of such truths) must always
;
(0
Prisdan
calls these
Verba Volimtativa ; they are called in Greek but more particularly n^oa/^s-nxa. See L. XVIII. 1129. s&e ApolloniiiS) L. III. c. 13. where this whole doctrine
Infinitives,
is
Verb. Gr.
Lot. p. 685.
Ed. Far.
Verbo, &c.
Nee omne
w-jrage/x^aTQy cuicunque
169
it
we may denominate
^. VHf,
that
reason the
MODE
OF SCI-
ENCE^).
we cannot
will
Again, as those that are ignorant and would be informed, must ask of those
that already know, this being the natural way of becommg Proficients ; hence
we may
call
the
Interrogative,
THE
MODE
OF PROFICIENCY.
fy
PERCONTABERE
Qua
Quid pure
Farther
&c.
HOR.
and most
still,
as the highest
Mode
is
legis-
m Ob noMlitatem procivit INDICATIVUS, solus Modus Seal, de Caus. L aptus Sdentiis, solus Pater Veritatis.
( )
Lat.
c.
116.
170
C. VIII.
HERMES.
legislative
this
TURE.
giver
Ci-
law-
therefore enacted, say the laws of England ; and in the same Mode
of every other nation. It is also in this Mode that the geometrician, with the authority of a legislator,
speak the
laws-
ence, which he
is
about to
establish.
THERE
surely cannot be called a part of their essence, nor indeed are they the
But these
essence of any other Attribute, being in fact the properties, not of Attributes,
but of Substances.
be
said,
is,
that
The most that can Verbs in the more elewhich respect the
Substantive,
terminations,
that
171
C.
VIIL
substance, with
tributes.
with respect to Adjectives. They have terminations which vary, as they respect
Beings male or female, tho' Substances past dispute are alone susceptible of
sexW.
We
matters,
(") It
rational
deny
Genders, or the distinction of Sex to Adjectives, and yet make Persons appertain, not to Substantives , but to
Verbs.
sistent,
is
who
Sf
says
At vero
Nominibus
ipsa Persona ; 6f Verba se liabent in Personarum ratione ad Nomina plane sicuti Aajectiva in ratione Generum ad Substantiva, quibus solis autor (Sauctitis scil. L, I. c. 7.)
recte
Genus
I.
c.
adscribit, exdusis
nerv. L.
12.
There
is
There are
the
the
Male and
Female
and but two Persons (or Characters essential to discourse) that is to say, the Speaker, and the Party addressed.
The
third Sex
being in
and third Person are improperly so fact but Negations of the other two.
called,
172
HER M E
all
S.
among
)
of language, which essentials are the subject of our present inquiry. The principal of these now remaining is
sentials^
(o)
Whoever would
in note
see
tance; referred to in
ticularly
ters
many
concerning Mind,
1750, the Author Mr. John Peivin, Vicar of Ilsington in Devon, a person who, though from his retired situa-
Philosophy both of the Antients and Moderns, and, more than this, was valued by all that knew him for his virtue and
worth.
tion
little
skilled in the
CHAP
173
CHAP. IX.
reference gies are Attributes, they have of course to certain energizing Substances.
Thus
&c,
it is
if
Men,
Energy doth not only require an Enerabout gizer, but is necessarily conversant some Subject. For example, if we say, Brutus loves we must needs supply
loves
from
use this word ENERGY, rather than Motion, more comprehensive meaning ; it being a sort of Genus, which includes within it both Motion and its Pr/its
(Q)
We
sation.
174
Ch. ix.
HER M E
S.
'
some one* The Sword wounds i. e. wounds Hector, Sarpedon, Priam,, or some one. And thus is it, that every Energy is necessarily situate between two Substantives, an Energizer which is active, and a SubHence then, if ject which is passive.
loves Cato, Cassias, Portia, or
the
Energizer lead the sentence, the Energy follows its character, and be-
comes what we call A VERB ACTIVE. Thus we say Brutus amat, Brutus loves.
contrary, if the passive Subject be principal, it follows the character of
this too,
On the
and then becomes what we call A VERB PASSIVE. Thus we say, Portia
amatur, Portia is loved. It is in like manner that the same Road between the
summit and
foot of the
Descent.
the Reason
why
cessary
175
for its
some Noun
Nominative Case( \
Brutus been already observed. loved Portia. Here Brutus is the Ener;
gizer
loved,,
the Subject. But it might have been, Brutus loved Cat o, or Cassius, or the Ro-
man 'Republic ;
for the
Energy
is
refer-
able to Subjects infinite. Now among these infinite Subjects, when that hap-
when we
slew himself, &c. in such Case the Energy hath to the same being a double
Relation, both active
this it
is
and
passive.
And
the
which gave
rise
among
Greeks
W The doctrine of
rejected
by
Impersujnal Verbs has been justly the best Grammarians, both antient and mo-
dern.
c. 3.
See Sanct.
Mm.
L.
I. c.
12.
L. III.
c.
1.
L. IV.
p. 1134. Apoll. L. III. In \vhich places the reader will see a proper sub. fin. Nominative supplied to aU Verbs of this supposed cha-
Priscim. L.
XVIII.
racter.
H E R M E S.
Greeks to that species of Verbs, called VERBS MIDDLED), and such was their
true and original use, however in many instances they may have since happened
to deviate.
still
retains
active Form,
and the
is
ex-
AGAIN,
in
some Verbs
it
happens
Thus when
we
it is
say, Ccesar walketh, C&sar sitteth, impossible the Energy should pass
out
(c) Toe,
yxg x<*Xe/xV*
/AE (Torero?
S|<ZT<> evsgysrtxws K,
Verbs middle,
sive Character.
The Verbs, called admit a Coincidence of the active and pas<]rx9v)Tix.v)S tiiaQio-sus..
Apollon. L. III.
c. 7.
He
that
would
see this
whole Doctrine concerning the power of THE MIDDLE VERB explained and confirmed with great Inge-
may
dioram.
lately published.
177
walking or sitting? It is the Will and Vital Powers belonging to Ccesar. And
what
to sit
is
?
It is this ing also to the same Casar. then forms that species of Verbs, which
fit
to call
VERBS NEUTER,
as if indeed they
were
when
perhaps (like Verbs middle) they may be rather said to imply both. Not however to dispute about Names, as these
Neuters
in their
Verbs
Cc )
express
by the Terms,
'Avrova.9etoc,
Prisdan renders qua ex se in seipsa fit intrimecus Passio. L. VIII. 790. Consentii Ars apud Putscji. p. 2051.
178
.Ch.
HERMES.
Verbs cannot, their passive Subjects being infinite hence the reason why it is
;
ix.
common grammars
that
Verbs Active
require
It
may be
;
Actives, can
upon occasion
is
racter
tive,
that
to say, can
the
and assume
This happens, when the Discourse respects the mere Energy or Affection only, and has no regard to
themselves.
the Subject, be
it
this thing
ros,
or that.
Thus we
say, ax
to read^
oTv ocvayuumeiv
This
Man
speaking only of the Energy, in which we suppose him deficient. Had the Discourse been upon the Subjects of
reading,
'o/.AjfK,
He
them, ax. W$EV divxyivua-xttv toi knows not how to read Homery or Virgil^ or
Cicero , &c.
Thus Horace,
Qui CUPIT aut METUIT, juvat ilium Ut lippum pictce tabulae
sic
domus aut
res>
He
3300K
THE FIRST.
179
the above species of Verbs, the Middle cannot be called necessary, be-
OF
cause most languages have done without it. THE SPECIES OF VERBS there-
ACTIVE, the PASSIVE and the NEUTER, and those seem essential to all languages whatfore remaining
are the
ever^
N2
affections prevail) has the
THERE
as the
Man
same joy in a House or Estate, with bad Eyes has infine Pictures. So Ccesar
see follow one
The Glory
it
seems
was
Events.
as quick, as he could
come
himself,
he saw, and whom he conquered, was not the See Apoll. L. III. c. 31. thing, of which he boasted.
p. 279.
Whom
The
Stoics,
in their
logical
making
When
II
ER
M E S.
far-
THERE
ther,
Verbs.
of greater part
them denote Attributes of Energy and Motion. But there are some which appear to denote nothing
more,
When a
then as
the
Verb
Power
of a perfect
K^T^/O^*, a
Predicable, or else, from its readiness otp^fowjy, to co-incide with its Noun in completing tlic Sentence, they called
it
2i/p<,Aa a Co-incider*
When
Noun
as
to
form a perfect
with such
^u^drst /asr/sAe/ Such a Verb, from its near approach pcenitct to just Co-incidence , and Predication, they called H
Nominative,
still
ment, some other Noun under an oblique Case, as nxar^y $Air A/Wx, Plato loveth Dio (where without Dio or some other, the Verb loreth would rest indefinite:) Such Verb,
from
181
-
and Equalleth in. English, mean nothing more than wig Iqi, is equal. So Albeo in Latin is no more than albiissum.
N3
from
>?//,,
Cam-
this Defect,
something
less
dicable.
two Nouns in oblique Lastly, when a Verb required to render the Sentiment complete ; as when we say Cases,
XwxfaTE/
'A*.tutdtitis /uJAe/,
Tcedet
me
Vita;,
or the like
Such Verb
>j
cider,
or an imperfect Predicable.
when employed along with Nouns, to the forming of ProAs to the Name of 'PHMA, or VERB, they depositions.
nied
it
to
them
all,
giving
it
L. III.
c.
Theod. Gaz.
Gram. L. IV.
From
it
appears, that
vrlova y
all
Verbs
HERMES.
Campique ingentes ossibus albent.
said
ofTumeo.*
Mons tumefy i.e. tumidus est, is 'tumid* To express the Energy in these instances, we must have recourse to the Inceptives^
Fluctus uti primo Vento.
ccepit
cum ALBESCERE
Virg.
ness
Freta ponti
Incipiunt agitata
TUMESCERE.
Virg..
TUB RE
which are formed out of Nouns. So that in Abstract Nouns (such as Whitefrom White, Goodness from Good)
as also in the Infinitive Modes of Verbs, the Attributive is converted into a Substantive
;
trary
is
Such
are
to
act the
Syllaturire
from
Sylfa,
to medi-,
tate
183
did.
Ch.lX.
by way of counsel
to himself
o%&
BE-
STERNHOLD
himself he
OUT-STERN-
HOLDED.
And
ler,
nary Bishop in the Reign 'of Queen Mary, says of him, that he OUT-BON^NER'D et;e7* BONNE R himself*
AND
so
much for
IN
THE
N4
)
CHAP.
30.
* Church
VIII. p.
2L
184
H E R M E S,
CHAP. X.
Concerning those other Attributes,
Participles
and Adjectives.
Ch. X.
HE
of an Assertion.
the Assertion 9
Now
if
we take away
and thus destroy the Verb, there will remain the Attribute and the Time, which make the essence of a PARTICIPLE. Thus take away the Assertion from the Verb, Tqaitpei, JVriteth, and
there remains
the
Participle,
r^cpo;:/,
Writing, which (without the Assertion) denotes the same Attribute, and the
same Time.
in
rf#\J/#
we
of
185
AND
so
much
for
PARTICIPLES^).
THE
The Latins
are defective in this Article of Parti-
<*>
ciples.
Times
On
Passives
Lave Participles of the Past (such as Scriptus) but none of the Present or Future, unless we admit such as Scrt*
bendus and Docendus for Futures, which Grammarians
controvert.
The want
for
by
for
a Periphrasis
ygx(po(AEvos
dum
y^^as
we
Modes and
Tenses.
N.
This Analogy
is
perhaps liable to
few Exceptions
as any.
little
we
seems
186
Ch.X.
HERMES.
nature of Verbs and Participles being understood, that of ADJECTIVES
THE
becomes easy. A Verb implies (as we have said) both an Attribute., and Time, and an Assertion ; a Participle only implies an Attribute, and Time, and an
ADJECTIVE
that
is
JECTIVE
sence either in
Motion or
its
Privation.
in general the Attributes of quantity, quality, and relation (such as many and few, great and little, black and white,
Thus
double, treble,
quadruple,
seems wrong to annihilate the few Traces, that may be It would be well therefore, if all writers, who found.
endeavour to be accurate, would be careful to avoid a corruption, at present so prevalent, of saying, it was wrote,
for,
it
was written
he was driven ;
the proper Participle, without any necessity from the want of such Word.
I have went, for, I have gone, &c. a Verb is absurdly used to supply
i
which instances
187
are
all
denoted by ADJEC-
TIVES.
Mo-
assume an assertion, and appear Of such we gave instances as Verbs. before, in albeo, tumeo, -l<r&& and others.
9
These however, compared to the rest of Verbs, are but few in number, and may be called, if thought proper, Verbal Adjectives.
It
is
in
like
manner,
that Participles insensibly pass too into Adjectives. Thus doctus, in Latin, and learned in English, lose their power, as
Participles,
and mean a Person posThus sessed of an habitual Quality. Vir eloquens means not a man now speaking, but a man who possesses the habit of peaking, whether he speak or no. So when we say in English, he is a thinking Man, an understanding Man, we jnean not a person, whose mind is in
actual
188
H E R M E S.
Gh.X. actual Energy, but whose mind is enriched with a larger portion of those
It is indeed no wonder, as all powers. Attributives are homogeneous, that at
times the several species should appear to interfere, and the difference between
not al-
ways
to
other.
have shewn already^) in the Instances of *iXiT7r/Ji/, Syllaturire, 'ATOxauff&qubwai, and others, how Substantives
may
Attributives.
We
shall
they
stile
may When we
p. 182,
183.
189
Ch.
and the philosophy spoken of, receive a stamp and character from the persona, whom they respect. Those persons
therefore perform the part of Attributes, that is, stamp and characterize their
respective Subjects.
Hence then
they
and assume,
And
thus
it is
we
say, the
stile,
is
the Ciceronian
philosophy.
It
in
trumpet of Brass, we say, a brazen Trumpet; for a Crown of Gold, a golden Crown, &c. Even Pronominal Substantives
admit the
like mutation.
Thus,
Book of Me, of
Him, we say, My Book, Thy Book, and His Book; instead of saying the Country of Us, of You, and of Them, we say Our Country, Your Country, and Their Country, which
Words may be
minal Adjectives.
called so
many
PronoIT
190
Ch.X.
HERMES
IT has been observed already, and must needs be obvious to all, that Adjectives, as
no
And
ber,
and case of
their Substantive,
seems
that
to
into
them with
fectly
homogeneous
with respect to
the
They
are
homogeneous with respect to Verbs, as both sorts denote Attributes; they are
heterogeneous with respect to Nouns,
as never properly denoting Substances.
THE
that
is
VERBS, PARTICIPLES,
'
and
(c)
Sup. p. 171.
CHAP.
192
HER M E
S.
CHAP. XL
Concerning Attributives of the second Order.
Ch. XI.
ed denote the Attributes of Substances, so there is an inferior class of them, which denote the Attributes only of Attributes.
To
kind
Cicero and Pliny were both of them eloquent ; Statins and Virgil both of them wrote ; in these insay,
when we
stances the Attributives eloquent, and wrote, are immediately referable to the
substantives Cicero, Virgil, &c. As therefore denoting THE ATTRIBUTES OF
,
SUBSTANCES, we call them ATTRIBUTIVES OF THE FIRST ORDER. But when we say Pliny was moderately eloquent, but Cicero exceedingly eloquent ; Statins wrote indifferently, but Virgil
wrote
193
Moderately, Exceedingly, not referIndifferently, Admirably, are able to Substantives, but to other At tribu-
Wrote.
As
GRAMMARIANS have given them the Name of 'E9r*ppvj(jL2T#, ADVERBIA, ADVERBS. And indeed word 'Pvj(Ji#, or Verb, in
if
its
we take
the
most compre-
hensive Signification, as including not only Verbs properly so called, but also
Participles
and
Adjectives
[an usage,
we
name,
cfe
Interpretations,
as
"A^WWO*
xara
as
a Fer6
So
j
AmnioniUS
TTO
TO
/AEV
AIK.AIO2
bVa TO^avTa
'PHMATA
Atycr0a<
KAAO2 ^ ex Oi\Ois
MATA.
According to
this Signification
(that
oi
de-
194
Ch. XI.
[/,#,
HERMES.
or
ADVERB,
pellation,
SPEECH, THE NATURAL APPENDAGE OF VERBS. So great is this dependence in Grammatical Syntax, that an Adverb can no more subsist without its
Verb, than a Verb can subsist without
its
Substantive.
It
is
in certain natural Subjects. Every Colour for its existence as much requires
its
AMONG
FAIR, JUST, and the like, are and not NOUNS. Am. in libr. de Interp. VERBS,
See also of
thii
c. 6.
Treatise,
Note ( a)
p. 87.
Nam
CIPIALE
p. 574.
VERBUM
This notion of ranging the Adverb under the same Genus with the Verb (by calling- them both Attributives)
( fc )
it
the Attributive of an
Attributive)
is
conformable
195
AMONG
are reckoned Quantities, and Qualities. Thus we say, a white Garment^ a high
Mountain.
tities
Now
some of
these
Quan-
and Qualities are capable of InThus we say, tension, and Remission. a Garment EXCEEDINGLY white; a Mountain TOLERABLY high, or MODE-*
RATELY
high*
It
is
Theodore Gaza
Aoy
o'tov
ADVERB,
$)
as follows
//Jg-oj-
aiflurov
ItriOerov
AEyo/tAEvov,
ETHXeyo/^EVov pv^/xTi. ry
Part of Speech devoid of Cases, predicated of a or subjoined to it, and being as it were the Verb's Verb,
properly the Adverb
L. IV. (where by the way we may observe^ is made an Aptote, since its sometimes has cases, as in Valde Sapiens; principal sometimes has none, as in Valde amat.) Prisciaifs deAdjective.
how
finition of
an Adverb
is
as follows
ADVERBIUM
est
pars
nomina
;
Iwrno
appellativis nominibus adjuncta ; ut prudens prudenter egit ; felix Vir ; feliciter vivit. L. XV.
.
p. 1003.
And before,
quasi ADJECTIVA
VERBORUM
I. p.
574.
I. c. 3.
196
Ch. XI.
HERMES.
that Intention
condary Attributives, or Adverbs, to denote these two, that is, Intension and The Greeks have their &vRemission.
paqSg \bx\iq&
diocriter
ly,
9
-craw,
wiqx
the Latins
tfye
lerably, indifferently,
&c.
FARTHER
different
may be
compared together.
Garment A be EXCEEDINGLY White, and the Garment B be MODERATELY White, we may say, the Garment
is
MORE
ment B.
MORE
not only denotes Intension, but relative Intension. Nay we stop not here.
We
tive
197
-
than which ch XT
there
none greater.
is
the
MOST high
Even
Verbs, properly
so they admit also these comparative Thus in the following Example ones.
Fame he LOVETH uonfrthan Riches, but Virtue of all things he LOVETH MOST the Words MORE and MOST denote
the different comparative Intensions of the Verbal Attributive, Loveth*
and of its
different
Excess,
and one
Were we
we ought perhaps to introduce infinite, which is absurd. For why stop at a limited Number, when in
grees than these,
all
ncr
198
Ch. XI.
H E R M E S,
ner infinite
?
There are
infinite
De-
grees of more White, between the Jirst Simple White, and the Superlative,
Whitest
the
same may be
said of more
Great, more Strong, more Minute, $c. The Doctrine of Grammarians about
which they call the Positive, the Comparative, and the Suboth perlative, must needs be absurd
;
because in their Positive there is-f-no Comparison at all, and because their Superlative is a Comparative, as much
!
.
Athenians
LIME of all
>
-
Cadit
et Ripheits
JUSTISSIMUS UNUS
Virg,
Quifuit
in Teucris
IT
Qui
(soil.
computatur .
Con-
199
Compa-
Ch. XT.
their
their intensive.
Thus
in the
Degree,
tentes.
Virg.
est
Rusticior paulo
Hor.
IN the
learned,
is
erf
Man, a
that
Degree.
\
Authors of Language have contrived a method to retrench these Comparative Adverbs, by expressing their force in the Primary Attributive. Thus
instead of More fair, they say FAIRER ; instead of Most fair, FAIREST, and the
THE
in the
Greek and
Latin*
200
Ch. XI. Latin.
H E R M E S.
This
Practice
however
has
thought too much diversified already, to admit more Variations without perplexity.
As there
are
admit of Such for others, which admit of none. example are those, which denote that
Quality of Bodies arising from their Figure ; as when we say, a Circular Table,
some
a Quadrangular Court, a Conical Piece of Metal, <$c. The reason is, that a million of things, participating the same
Figure, participate
participate that while
gular,
it
it
equally,
if
they
at
all.
To
less
say therefore
and
is
more or
absurd.
quadrangular
than B,
is
whether absolute or
relative.
Thus
201
Ch. XI.
Thus the
-two-foot
Rule
be more twenty than twenty Flies. If A and B be both triple or quadruple to C, they cannot be more triple, or more quaThe reason druple, one than the other. of all this is, there can be no Compawithout Intension and Remission
;
rison
there can be no Intension and Remission in things always definite ; and such are the Attributives, which we have last
mentioned.
see the
why
no Substantive
is
susceptible
Comparative Degrees. A Mountain cannot be said MORE TO BE, or TO EXIST, than a Mole-hill, but the More
of
these
and Less must be sought for in their In like manner when we Quantities.
refer
many
the Lion
than the Lion B, but if more any thing, he is more fierce, more speedy, or exceeding
202
Ch. XI.
}
H E R M E S.
So again, in referring many Species to one Genus, a Crocodile is not more an Animal, than a Lizard; nor a Tiger, more than a Cat, but if any thing, they are more bulky,
more strong, &c. the Excess, as before, being derived from their Attributes.
n g j n some such Attribute.
So
true
is
girite
C of MORE and LESS( ). But this by way of digression ; to return to the subject of Adverbs.
OF
Quantity discrete
(c )
ax ay
Torjr/ov,
C.
5.
11.
See also Sanctius, L. I. c. 11. L. II. c. 10, where the subject of Comparatives is treated in
a very masterly and philosophical manner. See also Derivantur igitur Comparativa a NoPriscian^ p. 598.
203
Ch.
may be added
XL
Equally, Proportionally, fyc. are Adverbs of 'Relation. There are others of Quality,
as
when we
say,
HONESTLY
brave,
indus-
trious,
PRUDENTLY
they J ought
a Portico
cut
TRI-
gramshould
different relait
be asked, how differ Honest, Honestly, and Honesty. The Answer is, they are in Essence the same, but they differ, in as much as Honest is the Attributive of a Substantive ; Honestly, of a Verb ; and
being divested of these its attributive Relations, assumes the Power
Honesty
',
of a Substantive, so as to stand by
itself.
THE
are
common
but
204
Ch. XI.
HER M E
S.
recourse to
of Place, as
;
when
went
THERE
he
HENCE;
as
when
went
AFTERWARD;
FOR-
MERLY, $c. Should it be asked why Adverbs of Time, when Verbs have Tenses? The Answer is, tho' Tenses
may
denote the greater distinctions of Time, yet to denote them all by Tenses would be a perplexity without .end. What a variety of Forms,
be
sufficient to
to denote Yesterday, To-day, To-morrow, Formerly, Lately, Just now, Now, Immediately, Presently, Soon, Hereafter, &c. ? It was this then that made the
Tern-
205
Ch. xi.
above the
Tenses.
the Adverbs just mentioned may be added those, which denote the Intensions
To
&c. as also Adverbs of Place, made out of Prepositions, such as.i/ and XTW
ly,
upward and downward, from up and down. In some instances the Preposition suffers no change, but becomes an Adverb by nothing more than its Application, as when we say, CIRCA equitat, he rides
from
civ &
and
X#T#, in English
ABOUT; PROPE
falling
in
;
cecidit,
he was
NEAR
Verum ne POST confer as culpam me, But do not AFTER lay the blame
meffi.
on
THERE
&>
A$t
Sostp. Charisiilnst.
Gram.
p. 170.
Terent Eu*.
II. Sc. 3.
206
HER M E
THERE
S.
are likewise Adverbs of Inter*rogation, such as Jfhere, Whence, Whither, How ; of which there is this re-
markable, that when they lose their Interrogative power, they assume that of a Relative, so as even to represent the
Relative or Subjunctive Pronoun.
Thus
Ovid,
Et Seges
est,
And Corn
doth grow
WHERE
Troif
town stood.
That
QUO,
IN
IN
WHICH,
rence,
$c. the
power of the
Relative,
Thus Te-
where UBI
relates to res,
and stands
for
yuibus rebus*
IT
207
-
manner that the Relative Ch XI Pronoun upon occasion becomes an Inin Latin and English. terrogative, at least
in like
Thus Horace,
QUEM
So Milton,
TV HO first seducd them
volt
.?
to that
foul re-
THE
reason of
alike, in
their original
still
Rela-
much
as ever.
The
difference
with an
208
Ch.
H E R M E S.
it
is
XL which
W no
first
seducd them ?
itself
supposes a Seducer, to which, though unknown, the Pronoun, WHO, has a reference.
Th' infernal Serpent
the Subject, which was indefinite, ascertained ; so that in the Interrogation is (we see) the
Here
in the
Answer we have
WHO
a Relative, as if it had been said originally, without any interrogation at all, It was the infernal SERPENT,
as
>
much
AND
other.
thus
is
it
that Interrogative^
into each
Verbs properly so
called.
We have
mon
to all Attributives.
We have likewise
209
CJi- XI.
VERBS may
Fart of Speech : from PREPOSITIONS, as when from After we derive Afterwards from PARTICIPLES, and through these from Verbs, as when from Know we derive
Knowing, and thence Knowingly ; from Scio, Sciens, and thence Scienter from ADJECTIVES, as when from Vir-
we derive Virtuously and Viciously from SUBSTANTIVES, as when from n/fivjx*; an Ape, we derive from jSAeVf iv, to look API HJ Y
tuous and Vicious,
oi/
J
nay
even from
PROPER NAMES,
as
when
we
say
it
Of
the
same
* Aristotle has a Cyclops.
.Kt/xXovoui* Cyclopicatty,
from
Eth. Nic. X. 9.
210
Ch.XI.
HERMES.
same
sort are
many
others, cited
by the
NOR
Derivation,
but in Signification
also.
every one of the Predicaments, and that the readiest way to reduce their Infinitude, was to refer
them by
classes to
capit quasi collata per satiram, concessd It is thus sibi rerum varia pot estate.
whose
() SeeP/%. L. XV.
Edit. Putxchii.
(f)
p,
$%
a/xs/voF
'itrvs
^IKOC.
t?o<ov,
-CTOCTOV,
&(>os rt, x. r. A.
Gram.
Introd. L. II.
(s)
211
it
to
be Ch.XL
AND now having finished these PRINCIPAL PARTS of Speech, the SUBSTAN* TIVE and the ATTRIBUTIVE, which are SIGNIFICANT WHEN ALONE, We prOceedto those AUXILIARYPARTS, which are ONLY SIGNIFICANT, WHEN ASSOCIATED. But as these make the Subject of a
HER-
213
HERMES
OR
A PHILOSOPHICAL ENQUIRY
CONCERNING^
UNIVERSAL GRAMMAR.
BOOK
II.
CHAP. L
Concerning Definitives*
\V HAT
matter of
is
eh.
I,
same
ture
;
here, as in
some
when
P3
DB-.
HERMES.
DEFINITIVES, the Subject of the present Chapter, are commonly called by Grammarians, ARTICLES, ARTICULI, "AfQ?*. They are of two kinds, either
those properly and strictly so called, or else thePronominal Articles,such as This,
That, Any, Sec.
WE
more
strictly so
Name.
To supply
this defect,
when
any Individual occurs, which either wants a proper Name, or whose proper Name/ is not known, we ascertain it, as well as we can, by referring it to its Species or, if the Species be unknown, then at least to some Genus. For exa ample a certain Object occurs, with head
;
215
Ch.
I.
we
refer
it
to
its
proper Species,
Dog, or Horse, or Lion, or If none of these Names fit, the like. we go to the Genus, and call it, Anicall it
and
mal.
t
BUT
at
this is
not enough.
The Thing,
which we are looking, is neither a What is it Species, nor a Genus. then ? An Individual. Of what kind ? Known, or unknown ? Seen now for the Jirst time, or seen before, and now re*
membered ?
the use
It
is
here
we shall discover
(THE).
ception,
of the two Articles (A) and (A) respects our primary Per-
as un-
known; (THE) respects our secondary Perception, and denotes Individuals as known. To explain by an example I see an object pass by, which I never saw till now. What do I say ? There
P4
goes
216
Ch.
I.
HERMES.
goe s A Beggar
Man
What do
Beggar
then
zvith
THE
ticle, only is
unaltered.
The
Individual, once
recognized as something known, and that merely by the efficacy of this latter Article, which tacitly insinuates a kind of previous acquaintance, by referring the present Perception to a like Perception already past/
fl
now
>
THE
Truth
is,
for the
most
I <) See B.
I. c. 5. p.
63, 64,
the Article (A) leaves the Individual itself unascertained, whereas the Article
(THE)
is
for
and that reason the more accurate Deascertains the Individual also,
finitive
of the two.
perhaps owing to the imperfect manner, in which the Article (A) defines, that the Greeks have no Article
IT
is
thing prefixed, but only the Article withdrawn/ 6) Even in English, where the
Article
')
a T
uoi
7rfo<rw7r
tsors
olyti.
wo
o/oy/,ov
times understood
indefinitely,
Apoll. L. IV. See of the same L. I. c. 6, 36. <n tt~(rt author, "Afyov sc.) S' aWo%jcp/y s7ocyvft/<7//,!v ra Iv rfi crvvni^st' olov I*
c. 1.
makes
to be definite as
to their Person.
*18
Ch.I.
HERMES
Article (A) cannot be used, as in plurals, its force is exprest by the same Ne-
Men, means those are Individuals, of which we possess some previous Knowledge. Those are Men, the Article apart, means no more than that they are so many vague and
gation. Those are T n E
uncertain Individuals, just as the Phrase, Man, in the singular, implies one of
the
same number.
BUT
Tiy,
yti.
it
Se
O AN0POnOS,
TJ?TO
j
rOfya>fir/Avov
xj
01
yag
rtvat,
Xy/.
causes a
avra
fiahovroit
QOLO-KOVTSS
T*
TaguTtis yvuo-tus
$svrig<x,$.
The
Article
fore the
Review within the Mind of something known beThus if any one says texture of the Discourse*
*e,
"AvBguv'
speaks.
MAN
if
CAME (which
it is
is
the same, as
when we
say in English A
man came)
not evident, of
then
fore.
tide
it is
he says o av9gvir<&> ^xs, evident ; for he speaks of some Person known beis
But
And this
is
zohat those
Ar-
ther.
219
BUT
have no Article
correspondent to the Article (A,) yet nothing* can be more nearly related, than
their
'o,
to the Article
THE.
pao-iXevg,
THE King; TO
SS^y,
THE
Gift, $c.
and most
now
re-
maining.
ev
ISiov
&**
#i/<02
vj
Now
liar
the
shewn elsewhere, is that Reference, which implies some certain Person already mentioned. Again 'Ou y<z$ S^ye TZ
e
TO
j9fOv 5
l^l^og Iqw
vj
f.
JFor
Nouns of
Reference,itnless
20
HERMES.
tick, whose peculiar Character
is
Refe-
rence.
aw
blished acquaintance^^
His
Names
is
worth remarking.
tells us)
isy
Name.
To
For example
chiefs,
who bore
the
name of Ajax.
when
It
tlaat
this
was
one of them
from
ApoU. de Synt. L.
is
I. c.
6, 7.
His account of
RE-
as follows
yvieo-is,
'I(^'a;//,a5
aiMf<p<7as -cr^oxTE/Ary/xanr
JtuTs^a
The
rence
if
Knowledge of some
already mentioned,
L.
II. c. 3.
221
Ch.
Jf both Aj axes
Even EpiApollonins proceeds thets themselves are diffused thro' various Subjects, in as much as the same Adjective may be referred to many
Substantives,
render both
Parts of Speech equally definite, that is to say the Adjective as well as the
Substantive, the Adjective itself assumes an Article before it, that it may indicate
a Reference
[xova^jxvi
thor's
own
T^uCpwj/
Phrase.
o
And
thus
it is
we
say,
rf#[x|ji#Tixc),
Trypho
&
THE
The
Grammarian; A^oXXdS^g^
Apollodorus
K.u%\>\vou^,
THE
Cyrenean,
Sec.
Author's
222
Ch.l.
HERMES.
Author's Conclusion of this Section
is
worth remarking,
TO TCJ8T0V
<r#
V)
tefavug
%*
y.a.1
TO IfttdWocta
TO!
xu^/y
ovo\k&TiIt is with
is
here
the Adjective to
an Individuality, as
precise, as the
proper
carry this reasoning farther, and shew, how by help of the Article
WE
may
even common Appellatives, come to have the force of proper Names, and that unassisted by epithets of any kinds. Among
meant Ship ; EI/SX#, Eleven ; and ''AvQf WT^, Man. Yet add
the Athenians
nAoibi/
but the Article, arid To nXo7ov,THE SHIP, meant that particular Ship, which they
sent annually to Delos ; O* Ev5fx, THE ELEVEN meant certain Officers of Juse/
City,
is
<d >
223
;
a Name common to
and Speaker, Men. Yet if we prefix the Article, T H E CITY means our Metropolis and TIIF
;
Ch.
SPEAKER,
Parliament.
AND
rence,
thus
it is
by an
r eas} transition,
comes
to say,
that
general and universal Notoriety. Thus among the Greeks' oUoi^g, THE POET,
meant Homer^; and O $*|iftij*<r*j6 THE STAGIRITE, meant Aristotle; not that
there
( )
that
we may
There are so few exceptions to this Observation, Yet fairly admit it to be generally true.
by the Phrase
voiifaf,
Plato also in
Book
of
Laws
H*siod
after the
same manner.
HERMES
were not many Poets, beside Homer ; and many Stagirites, beside
there
IT
tells
to assert
e^oftly
dvcti
TW
The
vj5ovi}i/
ccya&ov, or,
TO
or,
that, Pleasure
first
is
A GOOD,
only makes it a common Object of Desire, upon a level with many others, which daily raise
the last supposes it that supreme and sovereign Good, the ultimate
;
THE GOOD.
our wishes
Scope of vours.W
all
BUT
been no meaning, but when associated to some other word. To what words then
to pursue our Subject. It has said already that the Article has
may
it
be associated
To such
as re-
quire
Analyt. Prior. L.
I.
c.
40.
225
Ch.
V
by nature a De~
?
I.
And
be.
Not
as
may
Nor yet
wise.
those,
remains then they must be which though indefinite, are yet caIt
pable, through
definite,
UPON these Principles we see the reason, why it is absurd to say, o EFQ, THE I, or osr, THE THOU, because nothing
can make those Pronouns more
than they are, &
definite,
as-
serted
<e)
Apollonius
makes
it
p0oy.
That therefore
is
Indication or Reference
ASSOCIATE.
L. II.
q. 5.
fo^cmifej
igitiir
Jure
prima
ct secunda
226
Ch.
I.
HERMES.
Names, and though the Greeks say o SOW^T^, 'S.&vbwxvi, and the like, yet the Article is a mere Pleonasm,
serted of Proper
vj
fectly defined, so
them
whom some
;
made
Duad,
already
Au#
when he speaks of
the contrary,
if it
Two
Poets, this
may mean
sine dubio
sunt
XII.
p. 938.
Book,
Supra omnes
PERSONAS PRONOMEN.
Apollon. L.
I. c. 16.
And
Sense
hence
this
Numeral, being
(as
in this
indefinite
it-
indeed are
is
it
all others, as
to
well as
self)
farced
whenever
And
thus
it
THE Two
and OI ATO in Greek, mean nearly the same thing, as BOTH or AM^OTEPOI. Hence also it is, that as Two, when taken alone, has reference to some primary and indefinite Perception, while the Article, THE, has reference to some secondary and definite^ ; hence I say the Reason, why it is bad Greek to say ATO OI AN0PQIIOI, and bad English, to say Two THE MEN. Such Syntax is in
fact a Blending of Incompatibles, that
is
Q2
to
th * This ^Eneid. v. 511. explains Seroius on the XII where he tells us that Duorum is put for Amborum. In English or Greek the Article would have done the busi-
Two, or row
$vo~v
pr
Articles to prefix.
228
ch
-
HERMES.
1-
and
cannot possibly be
which
is
defined as well as
it
is
So
likewise,
correct
to say, oi ATO
AN0PQIIOI, THE TWO MEN, because here the Article, being placed in the beginning, extends its Power as well
through
both.
Substantive
as
Attributive^
to define
them
may
it
be, so
which admit
not, because they are not Of this sort are all to be defined at all.
THE WHO
is
229
ch L
-
WHO
OT,
HOW
MANY-,
HOW GREAT.
C
The
Reason is, that the Articles O and THE, respect Beings, already known ; Interrogatives respect Beings, about which we
are ignorant
;
for as to
is
what we know,
Interrogation
superfluous.
IN a word
tives,
It is these, and Species of Beings, which, by assuming a different Article, serve either to explain an Individual
upon
tion, or repeated
Knowledge/*)
Q3
(*)
We
Apollonius calls TI2, IvaMretrw rZv afaui, a Part of Speech most contrary, most averse to Articles, L. IV.
c. 1.
c*)
What
is
we
230
Ch.I.
HERMES.
here subjoin a few Instances of the Peculiar Power of ARshall
WE
TICLES.
In English these are distinguished by their Position, the Subject standing^'rsf the Predicate last .
,
and a Predicate.
Happiness
is
is
Pleasure
;
the Subject
If we change their order, and say, Pleasure is Happiness ; then Pleasure be-
and Happiness the In Greek these are distinPredicate. guished not by any Order or Position, but by help of the Article, which the Subject always assumes, and the Predicate in most instances (some few excomes the
Subject,
cepted) rejects.
vovvj
V)
vj
Happiness is Pleasure
Pleasure is Happiness Fine things are difficult
Difficult things arefine
evSaipovta
eu5#i[x0i//3
T<X
vjJoi/vi
%&\tita
TO.
n&\a.
xtfAar.
%oc\e^d
In
we
have in English.* In Greek the Article does no more, than imply a Recognition. See before p. 216, 217, 218.
231
ch
-
For
example
Tj[juv]Qvj
'o TlToXefju^
Ptolemy,
the
The
Participle yywfWL'4(fcfo#$ has here no other force, than to denote to us the Time,
when Ptolemy was honoured, viz. having presided over the Games.
if,
after
But
join
say,
we
and
Oyu(juv#a-*#f%vjJ-#
IlToXffjuSi^ eTJ^Ovj,
our
meaning
is
then
Participle in this case, being joined to the Article, tends tacitly to indicate not
honour.^
Q4
I.e. 33, 34.
IN
232
Cb.
HERMES.
L
IN English
marking,
likewise
it
is
deserves re-
how
the Sense
changed by
changing of the Articles, tho' wq leave every other Word of the Sentence un-
And Nathan said unto David, THOU ART THE MAN.* Inthatsingle
touched.
THE, that diminutive Particle, all the force and efficacy of the Reason is contained.
the Premises
applied, and so firmly fixed, as never to be shaken. It is possible this Assertion may appear at first somewhat
strange
but
let
him,
who doubts
it,
only change the Article, and then see what will become of the Prophet and
his reasoning.
And Nathan said unto David, THOU ART A MAN. Might not
the
King
well have
demanded upon so
impertinent a position.
Non
dices hodie,
quorsum h&c
tarn
pu-
tida tendant ?
BUT
*
2Y
El 'O
ANHP.
Br<A.
B'.
xr.
iC'.
233
ch
T*
BUT enough
mighty
to our regard, " however in appearance they may be " trivial and low."
"
THE ARTICLES
PRONOMINAL AR-
TICLES, such
as,
27/z's,
we have spoken
of Pronouns/) where
(> See B.
I. c. 5. p.
72, 73.
It seems to
have been
which induced
Tongue
non desiderat ; ideoque in alias part es orationis sparInst. Orat. L. I. c. 4. So Scaliger. His deguntur.
iS) satis
non neglectos a
ubt aliquid prceeffitiunt
iS)
Nam
scribendum
(l\i^t
234
Ch.
I.
H E R M E S.
when they may be taken as Pronouns, and when as Articles* Yet in truth it
must be confessed,
if the
Essence of an
Article be to define and ascertain, they are much more properly Articles, than
any thing
else,
and
as such should
be
considered in
Universal Grammar.
say,
THIS Picture I approvei but THAT I dislike, what do we perform by the help of these Definibut bring down the common Appellative to denote two Individuals, the one as the more near, the other as the more distant ? So when we say, SOME
tives,
Thus when we
men
tal,
are virtuous, but ALL men are morwhat is the natural Effect of this
to define that Uni-
expletur
Is
aut ILLE
Is,
sit,
aut, Ille
aut qui
memoriam renovandam, cujus antea non nescii sumus, aut ad pr&scribendam intellectionem, quce latius patere queat ;
celuti
cum
Nam
rug.
aliifuere C. Ccesares.
De
131,
235
Ch.
I.
away
sation
The same
evident in such
Sentences, as
;
of acting, and SOME men will find fault , &c. For here SOME, OTHER, and ANY,
serve all of
them
and OTHER,
to
ing Part,
Sometimes this last Word dealready. notes a large indefinite Portion, set in op-
some single, definite, and remaining Part, which receives from such Opposition no small degree of heightenThus Virgil, ing. Excudent ALII spirantia mollius &ra;
position to
vivos ducent de
mar-
Orabunt causas
decent
meliiis, cceliqne
meatm
Tu
ROMANE,
jEn. VI.
memento, &c.
NOTHING
HERMES.
can be stronger or more sublime, than this Antithesis ; one Act
set as
NOTHING
to*
gether,
Tu Romane,
Men
vial
performed by so
tri-
BUT
to
CHAP
237
CHAP.
II.
CONNECTIVES
what follows
;
II.
which, according as they connect either Seritences or Words, are called by the different Names of CON-
JUNCTIONS, or PREPOSITIONS. Of these Names, that of the Preposition is taken from a mere accident, as it commonly stands in connection before the The name of Part, which it connects.
the Conjunction, as is evident, has reference to its essential character.
OF these two we shall consider the CON JUNCTION firs t,because it connects,
not Words, but Sentences, This is conformable to the Analysis, with which we
began
this
inquiry*,
Sup. p.
'11,
\%
538
Ch.
II.
9
H E ft M E S.
U s by parity of reason, to consider Senfences themselves before
Words.
Now
is
the Definition of a
follows
CONJUNCTION
as
making T wo
or more sigsignificant
nificant Sentences to be
ONE
Sentence^.
THIS
() Grammarians have usually considered the Conjunction as connecting rather single Parts of Speech, than
whole Sentences, and that too with the addition of like
with like, Tense with Tense, Number with Number, Case with Case, fyc. This SancJzus justly explores.
Conjunctio neque casus, neque alias paries orationis (ut se conimperiti docent) conjungit, ipsce enim paries inter sed conjunctio Orationes inter se conjungit. junguntur
Miner. L. IH.
c.
14.
He
by
a variety of examples. He had already said as much, L. I. c. 18. and in this he appears to have followed Sealiger,
who had
asserted the
Conjunc-
tionis
inconsultius prodidere ;
neque enim, quod aiunt, paries alias conjungit (ipsce enim sed conjunctio est, paries per se inter se conjurtguntur)
quce conjungit Orationes plures.
De
c.
165.
This
239
Idea of CONJUNCTIONS,
we deduce
manner.
CON-
who
junction,
always considers
it
in
Syntax
in his
as connecting
Words, though
its
Definition.
2.
this to
support
Aristotle's Definition,
Manuscripts.
$uvy
oi<rv)[ju)s,
A
EX.
is
-cro/en*
vje<pvKv7
lAtav
Quvw
of Signification , which
ficant articulate
is
so
formed
make ONE
signi-
Sound out of
which are each of them significant. Poet. c. 20. In this view of things, the one significant articulate Sound, formed by tJie Conjunction, is not the Union of two or more Syllables in
one simple Word, nor even of two or more Words in one simple Sentence, but of two or more simis
consider-
ed as ONE, from that Concatenation of Meaning effected by the Conjunctions. For example, let us take the Sentence, which follows.
Jf
Men
it is
their
240
Ch.ll.
H E R M E S.
CONJUNCTIONS, while they
ings, or not.
connect
For example
let
us take
these
it
were not
so ordained
by
the
Here are three Sentences, nature social. (2.) It is Man's Interest (1.) Men are by
of their Country.
(3.) It
is
Laws
to be just.
Lavs of every
two of these
;
Country that
Man
should be just.
The
first
Sentences are
made One by
the Conjunction, IF
these,
;
One with
and the
make
of which Aristotle
is
This explains a passage in his Rhetoric, where he men. *O ya O-V^KT^QS av TZOM TO tzroAXo.* tioilS the same Subject.
#f
lav
I/!0i) feov on
TBVVT/OI era" TO
;
EV
-CToXAa.
The
so that if it be taken away , Conjunction makes many, ONE is then evident on the contrary that one mil be MANY. it
Rhet.
its
III. c. 12.
many put
of one,
is,
MOV, aanhVa,
where by the
the three Sentences, resulting from this Dissolution, when (for nA0ov, a-rnj/lijo-a, and I^SO/AW, are each of them, that unconnected, so many perfect Sentences) prove
way
faculty.
Ammonlus^
241
enCh.-li.
Sentences
Rome was
and con-
nect them together by the Conjunction BECAUSE. Rome was enslaved, BE-
CAUSE
Here the
Manners must be reformed, OR Liberty Here the Conjunction, OR, will be lost
though
it
a perfect
Disjunc-
this
Part of Speech
//./<zv
elegant.
A*o
TW
E/
>.oyuv o
//,!
virxg%tv
o^/xa/v^y, o
|uAa>,
ru
piftiira
rcr/x^lvw
<^a
'CsXsiovtx.s
TJ Ix
simply,
and which
is strictly
ONE,
may
be considered as
on
analogous to a piece of Timber not yet severed, and called this account One. That, which denotes several Exist-
ences,
tive Particle, is
pieces ef Timber,
nails has
p. 54. 6.
an
apparent Unity.
Am.
in Lib.
de Interpret,
42
-Disjunctive.
HER M E
And
thus
S.
though
tences,
all
yet with respect to the Sense, some are CONJUNCTIVE, and some
and hence W
it is
that
different Species.
Conjunctions which conjoin both Sentences and their Meanings, are either
COPULATIVES, of CONTINUATIVES. The principal Copulative in English is, AND. The Continuatives are IF, BECAUSE, THEREFORE, THAT, fyc. The
Difference between these
Copulative does no
is
this
The
more than barely couple Sentences, and is therefore applicable to all Subjects whose natures; are not incompatible. Conttnu&tives, on the contrary, by a more intimate connection, consolidate Sentences into one
continuous
(*>
Thus
;
Scaliger.
erba
jungtiKt.
De CV L.
Lat.
167.
243
-
plicable only to
an
essential Co-incidence.
AND
Sun
Priscian was a
shineth,
GrammaSky
is
AND
the
are things that may co-exist, and yet imply no absurBut it would be absurd to say, dity. Lysippus was a Statuary, BECAUSE Pris-
because
these
cian was a
the
Grammarian ;
shineth,
is,
Sun
clear.
The Reason
;
with respect to
is
the
first,
the Co-incidence
merely aclast, it is
cidental
essential,
and founded
for the
in nature.
And
so
much
Distinction between
Copulatives
and Continuatives^.
R
(c )
As
Copulativa
est, qua;
sum.
plicit
Thus
Priscian) p. 1026.
But Scaliger
is
Sensum
244
Ch.n.
HERMES.
to Continuatives, they are eithet SUPPOSITIVE, such as, IF; or POSI-
As
TIVE, such as BECAUSE, THEREFORE, As, fyc. Take Examples of each you
will live happily )
i
you
you
live happily,
BECAUSE you
nestly.
FARTHER
cessarib, aut
non
neccssario
fy
si
fmnt
Copulative?, &c.
own account of
cant
ibid.
consequentiam rerum
is
signifi-
Scaliger's account
Ibid. c. 168.
the Copulative was 2yv^<7/x^ <rv(Awtexltxos; for the ContinuativC) a-vvawltx.^ ; the Etymologies of which words
justly distinguish their respective characters.
>
The
<,
old Greek
Con.
245
FARTHER
than
this,
the Positives
above-mentioned are either CAUSAL, such as, BECAUSE, SINCE, As, $c.
THEREFORE, WHEREFORE, THEN, $c. The Difference between these is this The Cauor
as,
COLLECTIVE, such
sals
is
subjoin Causes
to Effects
The Sun
inter-
in Eclipse,
BECAUSE
the
Moon
R3
venes
Conjunctions, which ire have called Suppositive or Conditional) while the Positive they called -cr<xowW?'xoi, or
Subcontinuativce.
proper characters.
oj
The
1
first
vtsa.(n
ff.li
axoAed/izy
rwx
$
p.
cum
rerum
1027.
necessaria;
subsistere
vtrumqueenim admittunt.
trary of the Positive, or
y
*
Ibid. c. 168.
a?aow
vwxg%tv
7r7/xo<
awn
name) Gaza
vroiyi
tellsr
us, ort
^trot,
rZeus eypdiMiva
subsistit^ conjungunt.
246
Ch.ll.
H
venes
ERM'E'-S.
THERENow we use
The
the
Causes
The Moon
FORE
Sun is
in Eclipse.
Causals in those instances, where, the Effect being conspicuous, we seek its
Cause; and
tions,
Collectives,
in
Demonstracalled,
and
Science properly so
where
It
sittve
may seem
at first
somewhat
strange,
why
the
Poas
been considered
Subordinate to the Supposithe, which by their antient Names appears to have been the fact. Is it, that tho
Positive are confined to
sitive
what
SuppoLight,
bles?
unless
Thus
it
it is
false to affirm,
As it is Day,
it is
But we may at midnight afactually be Day. firm, If it be Day, it is Light, because the, IF, extends
Nay we may affirm, by its help we please) even Impossibles. We may say. If the (if Sun be cubical, then is the Sun angular; If the Sky fall,
to Possibles also.
Thus too
Sculigcr
upon the
same occasion
De
C. L.
(as
it
were) suits
247
by
Ch.
II.
help
we
discern consequences'^.
ALL these Contimiatives are resolvable into Copulatives. Instead of, BECAUSE it Day, it is tight* we may say, It is Day, AND it is Light. Instead of, IF it be Day, it is Light, we may say, It is at the same time necessary to be Day AND
-is
9
Light ; and so in other Instances. The Reason is, that the Power of the
to be
Hence
nuative
may be
joined.
R
The
;
As
The Greeks
called the
latter 2tAAoy/s-<xof'.
fae,
Copulativw'omnes
prop-
Seal, de C,
169.
248
HERMES
to Causal Conjunctions (of which \ve have spoken already) there is no one
As
of the four Species of Causes, which for they are not capable of denoting
:
THE MATERIAL CAUSE The Trumpet sounds, BECAUSE it is made of Metal THE FORMAL The Trumpet sounds, BECAUSE it is long and hollow
example,
THE EFFICIENT
THAT
it
may raise
our courage. Where it is worth observing, that the three first Causes are ex-
by the strong affirmation of the Indicative, Mode, because if the Effect actually be, these must of necessity be But the last Cause has a different also.
prest
Mode, namely, the Contingent or Potential. The Reason is, that the Final
Cause, tho*
tion, is
it
may be
last in
Jirst in Specula^
That is to say, however it may be the End, which set the Artist first to work, it may still be an End beyond his Power to obtain, and which, like other Contingents, may
always
Event.
either
249
-
IT
THAT,
JW,
UT,
#c.
THE Sum
their
is,
that
ALL CONJUNC-
the
DISJUNC-
Name,
Sentenced.
WITH
fe)
See B.
I.
c.
8.
p. 142.
I.
I.
Note Note
awo
liriffV9$*fftv*
Disjunctives,
suntj
250
Ch. IL
HERMES
respect to these we may ob~ serve, that as there is a Principle of
WITH
UNION
by which THIS
is
DIVERSITY
diffused
in like
tion,
Now
sunt,
ffttcc,
'ftyunctinn
habenf.
senwm tamcn
1029.
And
hence
fiyes,
For though
(its
this
as
to
its
Intellection be tfifjunctive
end being to
yet as it
it is
as truly synthetical, as
I.
See Chap.
Note (6)
p. 3.
said to heighten
The DIVERSITY, which adorns Nature may be by degrees, and as it passes to different to become more and more intense. Some Subjects, when considered as Individuals, but things only coffer,
<*)
if
we
tinction:
recur to their Species, immediately lose all Dissuch for instance are Socrates and Plato.
251
Ch.
II.
Now
it is to
DISfirst
DISJUNCTIVES, some are SIMPLE, some ADVERSATIVE Simple, as when we say, EITHER it is Day, OR it
these
is
OF
same
such are
Man
and Lion.
again, which
and co-incide only in those transcendental Comprehensions of Ens, Being, Exdiffer as to Genus,
istence,
ties, as
Farther,
however moderate
their Diversity,
there
is
an appearance of OPPOSITION
with respect to each other, in as much as each thing is it self, and not any of the rest. But yet in all Subjects
Opposition is not the same. In RELATIVES, such as Greater and Less, Double and Half, Father and Son, Cause and Effect, in these it is more striking, than
this
it,
by
CONTRARIES, inch-as Black and White, Even and Odd, Good and
inferring
each
other.
In
Bad,
252
Ch.
II.
HER
js
M E S.
when we say, Night. The Dif-
Night
is
Adversative, as
Day, BUT it is ference between these is, that the simple do no more, than merely disjoin ; the Adversative disjoin, with an Opposition
It
not
concomitant.
Add
Ad-
Thus when we
The Number
Bad, Virtuous and Vitious, in these the Opposition goes still farther, because these not only diffei*, but are
even destructive of each other. But the most potent Opposition is that of 'A7/<pa<7^, or CONTRADICTION, when
we oppose Proposition to Proposition, Truth to Falsnood, asserting of any Subject, either it is, or it is not.
This indeed
is
itself to all
its
Re-
nor Contraries.
Besides these
Modes
:
between the
Name
thing,
and
its
Definition;
be-
tween the various Names, which bel'ong to the same thing, and the various things, which are denoted by the
same Name; all which Diversities upon occasion become a. Part of our Discourse. And so much, in short, for
the Subject
erf
DIVERSITY.
253
BUT an
we not only disjoin two opposite Attributes, but we definitely affirnj one, and deny the other. But when we say, The Number of the Stars is EITHER even OR odd, though we assert one Attribute to be, and the other not to be, yet the Alternative notwithstanding
finite.
is
left
inde-
And
so
much
junctives^).
As
simple Disjunctive ^, or Vely is mostly used But when it indefinitely, so as to leave an Alternative.
is
The
used
definitely, so as to leave
no Alternative,
it is
then
a perfect Disjunctive of the Subsequent from the Previ> It or, Et non. ous, and has the same force with
,
is
thus
Gaza explains
that Verse of
Homer.
croox
IA.
A.
That
is
to say,
/ desire
AND
NOT be
Verse
or sublative.
is
destroyed, the Conjunction % being avattgcnxos, It must however be confest, that this
ftaAAof, or avris
tators.
HERMES.
As
to Adversative Disjunctives,
it
ha&
been said already that they imply OPPOSITION. Now there can be no Opposition of the same Attribute, in the same Subject, as when we say, Nireus
was beautiful; but the Opposition must be either of the same Attribute in different
Subjects, as
Patriot,
when we say, Brutus was a BUT Cczmr was not -or of dif-
ferent Attributes in the same Subject, as when we say, Gorgias was a Sophist,
BUT
not a Philosopher
or of different
when
we
THE
VERSATIVES.
BUT
sides these
as
more beautiful,
The
BOOK
xteE
SECOND.'
is,
255
that
The Character of
these latter
ch IL
they go farther than the former, by marking not only Opposition, but that
Equality or Excess, which arises
among
Subjects from their being compared. And hence it is they may be called ADVERSATIVES OF COMPARISON.
BESIDES
men-
tioned, there are two other Species, of which the most eminent are UNLESS and
Troy will be taken, UNLESS the Palladiumbe preserved Troy will be taken., ALT HO' Hector de-
ALTHO'.
For example
fend
tives
it.
The nature of
these Adversa-
may be
is
thus explained.
As every
Event
by
Preventive.
And
1
as
every Cause
is
either adequate*^
Q? in-adequate (in-ade-
quate,
(*)
metaphysical truth.
at all.
No Cause,
any Cause
256
Ch.
ii.
HERMES.
quate,
when
it
UNLESS
alone
as
the
This
prevent
it.
The In-
Troy willbe taken, ALTHO' Hector defend it ; that is, Hector &
tives, as
ALTHO'
will
Defence
prove in-effectual.
THE Names
*tives,
ADE-
AND
thus
it
is
that
all
DISJUNCjoin
/riVES,thatisCoNJUNCTIONS,t^/bcAcOW-
(m)
They
called
sufficient
257
ChJl. join Sentences, but not"their Meanings , are either SIMPLE or ADVERSATIVE , and
that
all
ADVERSATIVES
are either
Ab-
solute or
or In-adequate.
WE
IN
Chapter with a
place
it
may be
observed,
through
force, according as
it
OR
odd-~-Every Proposition
true,
OR
false
no things are
tible
in
than the Subjects. But if we say, That Object is a Triangle, OR Figure contained under three right lines the
(OR) in this case hardly seems to disjoin, or indeed to
258
H E R M E S.
tinctly to express the
Thing,
first
Name, and then by its Definition. say. That Figure is a Sphere, OR a Globe,
by its So if we
OR a Ball
.tends no farther to disjoin, than as it distinguishes the several Names, which be-
(n
the Words, When and Where, and all others of the same nature, such as,
AGAIN
Whence, Whither, WTienever, Wherever., &c. may be properly called ADVERBIAL CONJUNCTIONS, because they participate the nature both of Adverbs and Conjunctions of Conjunctions, as they conjoin Sentences ; of Adverbs, as they
denote
(")
a Subdisjunctive ; sion, which they called Subdiyvnctiva, and that was SIVE. Alexander sive Paris ; Mars swe
Mavors.
end.
The Greek "Eir xv seems to answer Of these Particles, Scaliger thus speaks
quam
Disjunctives ,
the same
Et sane
enim
nomcn Subdisjunctivanim
tarn plane tKsjungit,
Nam
Diyunctivce
sunt in Contrariis
v.t^
De
C. L. Lat.
c.
170.
259
n.
AG A i N
and perhaps most ofthePrepositions (contrary to the Character of accessory Words, which have strictly no Signification, but when associated with other words) have
a kind of obscure Signification, when taken alone, by denoting those Attributes of
it is,
Time and
Place.
And hence
like
Grammar,
S 2
AND
ytvtroci
lirl
v>
(pvrov.
(p)
It
is
politest
and
all
the
260
HERMES.
AND
their
so
much
for
CONJUNCTIONS,
CHAP.
the rest, should have their works
all
filled
with Particles of
;
while
in the
polite works, our neighbours, scarce such a w ord as a Particle, or Is it, that where there is Conjunction is to be found.
r
modern
as well of ourselves as of
Words had to
where the Connection is little or none, such connectives are of little use ? That Houses of Cards,
without cement,
this the
may
Is
Cause
or have
?
we
Antients
unknown
c.
26
CHAP.
III.
PREPOSITIONS by
their Place,
their
name
express
Their Definition will distinguish them from the former Connectives. A PRE-
POSITION
is
it-
self of Signification, but so formed as to unite two Words that are significant, and
fa)
The
,
Stoic
Name
^
xara
for a Preposition
was
tion.
*ls
rats
'
&vvl<i%tus ytwflau
rois
^TUIKQIS T
xfa7crQoci avlois
Now
pf their Conjunctive
in
in other
proof
SyntflX)
262
;
II
ER
M E S.
relates to
will
Words only, and not Sentences) be better understood from the fol*
lowing Speculations.
things co-alescc and unite of themselves ; others refuse to do so without help,
SOME
were compulsion. Thus in AVorks of Art, the Mortar and the Stone co-alesce of themselves but
as
it
;
and
In nature
this is
all
more
For example;
Quan-
and Qualities co-alesce immediThus it is ately with their Substances. we say ,. a fierce Lion, a vast Mountain; and from this Natural Concord of Subject. and Accident, arises the Grammatical Concord of Substantive and 'Adjective.
In
call
them PREPOSIc. 5.
TIVE CONJUNCTIONS,
dpollon. L. IV.
p. 313.
Yet is
pletc Definition^
since
othr Conjunctions,
which are Prepositive as well as these. See Gaz. L. IV. de Praeposit. Prise. L. XIV. p. 983.
263
conquers; Darius
is
conquered.
Nay,
as
every Energy
is
a kind of
Medium
be-
Agent and Patient, the whole three, Agent, Energy, and Patient, coalesce with the same facility as when
tween
its
;
we
And
hence, that
cal
from
tural Co-alescence,
Verb.
Farther than
selves
Attributives them-
may be most
as
of them characteAttribu-
rized
he ran he was
and
Adjectives.
THE
be
this.
MAR,
264
Ch. HI.
HER
MAR,
M E S,
WHOSE
fuse doing so, one with another W. And hence those known Maxims in Physics, that Body is impenetrable ; that two Bodies cannot possess the
same place
that
FROM
when
tive
these principles
it
follows, that
the Verb, from the natural Co-incidence of Substance and Energy THE SUN
WARMETH.
fj )
sme
tiXsfantiatiter
unum
Ac-
ddens
CATO PUGNAT.
Seal*
177.
265
Ch- HI.
operates So likewise
both those places are already filled ; the Nominative by the Substance, SUN ; the Accusative by the Substance,
EARTH.
last,
Not
as
Attributes to these
for Attri-
or to
butes by nature they neither are, nor can be made. Here then we perceive the
Rise arid
these
Use of PREPOSITIONS.
Bv
we connect
those Substantives to
Sentences, which at the time are unable to co-alesce oj themselves. Let us assume
for instance a pair of these Connectives,
THRO', and WITH, and mark their Effect upon' the Substances here mentioned.
266
Ch.
III.
H E R M E S.
The splendid Sun WITH his Beams genially warmeth THRO' the Air
tioned.
the fertile Earth.
fore,
The Sentence,
;
as be-
the Sub-
both introduced ;
and not a Word, which was there before* is detruded from its proper place.
IT must here be observed that most, not all Prepositions seem originally
to
(C
if
formed
denote
the
is,
Relations
of
PLACE
The reason
this is that
grand Relation, which Bodies or natural Substances maintain at all times one to
another, whether they are contiguous or remote, whether in motion or at rest.
IT
may be
UNI-
VERSE
()
Omne
quare oput
qu& TO not
tremorum,
Him
Seal,
cliciemus Prceposi-
tionis cvsentiaZem
dcfinitionem.
de Caus. Ling.
Lat. c. 152.
267
Ch. IIL
consistent with
Thus
it is
tions to denote the contiguous Relation of Body, as when we say, Caius walketh
V
a Staff; the Statue stood UPON a Pedestal; the River ran OVER a Sand;
WITH
others
for
the
detached
Relation,
as
the
when we
Sun
is
say,
He is going
TO Italy
risen
ABOVE
So as to Motion
here the Preposition varies its character with the Verb. Thus if we say, that Lamp hangs FROM the Ceiling, the Pre-
FROM, assumes a Character of Quiescence. But if we say, that Lamp is falling FROM the Ceiling, the Prepoposition,
sition in
of Motio?i.
So
in Milton,
OVER
268
Ch.
ill.
HERMES.
Again
He Hung OVER
Rest.
though the original use of Prepositions was to denote the Relations of Place, they could not be confined to.
this Office only.
BUT
tended themselves to Subjects incorporeal, and came to denote Relations, as well intellectual as local. Thus, because in Place he, who is above, has commonly
the advantage over him,
who
is
below,
UNDER
to
OVER
his
of a King we People; of a
common
Soldier, he served
UNDER
such
;
So too we say, with Thought without Attention thinking over a Suba General.
;
from Fear;
out
of Love;
like
269
Men,
mediate reference to
Objects^
and that
in afterdays,
those Words, which they found already made, and transferred them by meta-
phor to intellectual Conceptions. There is indeed no Method to express new Ideas, but either this of Metaphor, or that of Coining new Words, both which have been practised by Philosophers and wise Men, according to the nature*
IN
Among
the
Words new
;
coined
we may
ascribe to
to Cicero,
r
Anaxagoras, 'o^oto^eta
Qiialitas; to Aristotle ,
to Plato, Howrys
*&V%z<**
to the Stoics,
Ows,
Among the Words transferxE^a-m, and many others. red by Metaphor from common to special Meanings, to
the Platonics
we may
and
Peripatetics^ Kotrvyogix,
to the Stoics,
to the
HERMES.
In the foregoing use of Prepositions, we have seen how they are applied
X2T#
that
pv'fft'tow,
is
to say,
But
here I cannot but observe, that he who pretends to discuss the Sentiments of any one of these Philosophers, or even to cite and translate him (except in trite
And
and obvious sentences) without accurately knowing the Greek Tongue in general ; the nice differences of many
Words
the Author
apparently synonymous ; the peculiar Stile of whom he presumes to handle ; the new coin,
ed Words, and new Significations given to old Words, used by such author, and his Sect ; the whole Philoso-
phy of such
cal,
Dependencies of
or Physical
;
He
preparation, attempts what 1 have said, will shoot in the will exdark ; will be liable to perpetual blunders plain, and praise, and censure merely by chance ; and
;
though he
may
Man,
Such
will certainly
among
Eye comprehends
a distant Prospect.
He may
Plains,
see
perhaps enough, to
Seas from
and
Woods
and
particulars,
fcelns.,
it is
271
Ch.
III.
have
E7r/^#<7Q#i, in
English,
to
to undervalue, to outforetel, to overact, in Greek and Latin, other go, &c. and instances innumerable. In this case the
Word, with which they are compounded; and this imparted Meaning in most,
instances will be found ultimately re-* solvable into some of the Relations of
PLACE,
(/)
as used either in
its
proper
or metaphorical acceptation.
LASTLY
(e>
Cfl
For example,
let
and Ex signify out of that Space ; PER, through it, from beginning to end ; IN, within it ; SUB, under it. Hence
JE
then
H E R M E S.
Ch.
ill.
LASTLY,
when PreNature,
then E and PER in composition augment : something not simply big, but big in excess ; something got out of the rule, and beyond >the measure ; Dico, to
speak
hear, and
are supposed to
Eun. V.
5. 20.
which
Comment)
is
an
"
AvZytrif.
Fart, to speak
EJfari, to
speak out
hence Sffdtum, an
Axiom or
,
as
it
were to
men, and
Cic.
Acad.
II. 29.
Permagnus,
the contrary^ IN and SUB diminish and lessen. Injustus, Iniquus, unjust, inequitable, that lies within Justice
On
so. far,
of
tliem ;
tending to black,
Subniger, blackish; Subrubicundus, reddish; and tending to red, but yet under the
Emo
ait:
ay ; hence
it
came
to signify to buy,
purchase.
because he, who buys, takes away his INTER, Between* implies Discontinuance ^
for
2173
Ch. in.
Homer,
Te*X&<r<rE
.
And
Se &&<*& Useol
362.
we have spoken in a preceding Chapter^. One thing we must however observe, before we finish this Chapter, which is, that whatever we may be told of CASES in modern LanBut of
this
is
exprestby
two
lie
between.
From
To
these
take a
Man
that
making a
also, Perimo, to him away thoroughly ; kill a Man, for indeed what more thorough taking away can well be supposed ? The Greek Verb, 'Ava/^sTv, and the English
So
Verb, To take
off,
And
thus
it is
that Prepositions
Words;
fe>
274
Ch.III.
HERMES.
two Methods, either by
Prepositions ; tive Cases by
Situation, or
by
the Nominative
and Accusa-
Situation
the rest,
shall
by
Prepositions.
But
this
we
make
CHAP
275
CHAP.
IV-
Concerning Cases.
CASES, or at least their various Powers, depend on the knowledge partly of Nouns, partly of Verbs, and partly of Prepositions; they have been reserved,
till
Ch. IV*
had
made
the Subject of so
THERE
are no
CASES
in the
modern
Languages, except a few among the ; primitive Pronouns, such as I and JE, and Moy; and the English Geni*
Skip y Ships.
From
this defect
however
we may be enabled
rri
to discover in
is,
some
sis
the Periphra-
/->
276
Ch. IV. sis,
H E R M E S.
which supplies
its
Case (as it were) unfolded. Thus Equi is analized into Du Cheval, Of the Horse,
Equo
into
Au
And hence we see that the GENITIVE and DATIVE CASES imply the joint
Power of a Noun and a
Preposition, the
Genitive's Preposition being A, De, or Ex, the Dative's Preposition being Ad,
or Versus.
WE
have not
this assistance as to
the
ACCUSATIVE, which
in
modern Lan-
guages (a few instances excepted)is only known from its position, that is to say,
by being subsequent
to
its
Verb, in the
THE VOCATIVE we
its little
unknown
to the
modern Languages, but often in the antient being supplied by the No*
minative.
THE ABLATIVE
by
the Romans only
277
with their Ch..lV.
have adopted
afc
to associate
Prepositions,
a Case certainly not necessary, because the Greeks do as well without it, and
because with the Romans themselves
is
it
frequently undistinguished.
THERE
much
remains the
it
NOMINATIVE;
which .whether
AB.
B
C
AC,
or
AD.
called
HER M E
S.
the contrary, and the Grammarians with them, made the Nominative a CASE
also.
(as it
were)
fall
from
the
Mind, or
discurfell
sive Faculty.
Now
when a Noun
thence
called
in its
it
AN ERECT, Or UPRIGHT CASE Or FALLING, such as AB, and by this name they distinguished the Nominative. ?-
under any of its variations, as for example in th% form of a Genitive, a Dative, or the like,
HTQSEIS
CASES, or
as
AC,
or
AD)
is
other (that
Gramma-
Method of enumerating the various Cases of a Noun, KAIEIS, DECLINATIO, a DECLENSION, it beSee Ammort. in Libr. de Interpr. p. 35,
279
Nouns
to
AB,
AC, AD,
#c.
shall treat
OF
the
the
these
CASES we
the
but of
four, that
is
to say, the
ACCUSATIVE, DATIVE.
ceding Chapter, that the great Objects of natural Union are SUBSTANCE and
ATTRIBUTE.
Now
from
this
Natural
SUBJECT and PREDICATE, and the Grammatical Concord of SUBSTANTIVE and ATTRIBUTIVE^. These CONCORDS in SPEECH produce PROPOSITIONS and SENTENCES, as that previous
280
Ch.IV. rnitted,
HERMES
we proceed by
is
observing, that
when a Sentence
ject,
and the Grammarians Substantive are all denoted by that Case, which we call the NOMINATIVE. For example, CTESAR pugnat y 1E$ jingitur, DOM us
cedificatur.
We may remark
too
way, that the Character of this tive may be learnt from its Attributive.. The Action implied mpugnat, shews its
by the Nomina-
Nominative CJ&SAR
ficient
to
be 311 Active
ef-
Cause; the tassion implied in Jingitur, she\ys its Nominative JEs to be a Passive Subject, as does the Passion in cedificatur prove DOM us to be
an
Effect.
has Cases,
it
imitates
its
Substantive,
and appears
as a Nominative also.
we
RO
find
est
it
in
such instances as
,*
So ClCE-
ELOQUENS VlTIUM
est
TURPE;
HOMO
281
it
HOMO
est
ANIMAL, &c.
(as
When
has
it is
no Cases,
assi-
milations as
has, those of
Number
CICERO
and Person*
as
when we
say,
FROM what
make
we may
Sentence be regular ^
by a
'Nominative
pear as Nominatives also that there may be a regular and perfect Sentence
without any of the other Cases, but that without one Nominative at least, this i$
utterly impossible.
Hence
therefore
we form its Character and Description THE NOMINATIVE is that Case, without
which
* What
sort of
have, see
before, p. 170,171.
282
HERMES.
We
after another Case.
Ch.IV. which there can be no regular^) and perare now to search fect Sentence.
may be assured
is
some
So we
in such
may
call Achilles
and Lysippus
and
still
Mind
is
and
not only requires some Agent, but it must have a 'Subject also to work on,
must produce some Effect. It is then to denote one of these (that is, the
it
and
of
( c)
may be irregular Sentences, which may be perfect Of this kind are all Sentences, without a Nominative.
there
made out
[JLXT<Z.
by the
Stoics
nx
283
fCh.iv.
SATIVE.
Achilles
REM
Lysippus fecit STATUAS Subject. here the Accusative denotes the Effect.
--
By these additional Explanations the Mind becomes satisfied, and the Sentences acquire a Perfection, which beIn whatever other fore they wanted.
manner, whether figuratively, or with Prepositions, this Case may have been
used,
its first
been that here mentioned, and hence therefore we shall form its Character and
Description THE ACCUSATIVE is that Case, which to an efficient Nominative and
a Verb of Action subjoins either the Effect
or the passive Subject.
IT has been said in the preceding Chapter^, that when the Places of the
284
'
HERMES.
and the Accusative are
filled
Cb.IV. Nominative
by proper
positions.
Now, though
this*
be so far
that (a
true in the
modern Languages,
,
very few instances excepted) they know no other method yet is not the rule of
equal latitude with respect to the Latin or Greek, and that from reasons which
we
AMONG
by Prepositions, there appear to be two principal ^ones and these are, the Term or Point, which something commences FROM, and the Term or Point, which something tends TO. These Relations the Greeks and
stantives denoted
;
Latins thought
of
so
of their own, which exprest their force, without the help of a Prepotions
sition.
,
Now
it
is
here
we behold
the
Dative,,
83
to ex-
theGENiTivE
being formed
press all relations commencing PROM ittendself; THE DATIVE, all Relations
ing TO
itself.
Of
this there
can be no
stronger proof, than the Analysis of these Cases in the modern Languages, which
we have mentioned
IT
in
is
already W.
I ask, To
I give.
is
The reason
is
is,
in
one
;
whom
whom
(./)
something
expected from
is
to.
in
one
something passes
X/fia,
So again
it
is
it
Term from, or
and
strict,
we read
Implentur
<*)
lAefpayV, made of Gold and Pausahias of the Olympian Jupiter , L. So says Ivory. V. p. 4PO. Sec also Horn. Iliad. 2. 574,
W)
H E R M E S,
Ch. IV.
The
were
old
the
much
y
as to say,
FROM
or
WHEN", we meet
Language such
Genitives as the Son of a Father ; the Father of a Son; the Picture of a Painter
;
&c. these
RELATIVES, and therefore each of them reciprocally a Term or Point to the other, FROM or OUT OF which it
are all
derives
lection.
its
fe)
Essence, or at least
its
Intel-
THE
te)
All Relatives are said to reciprocate, or mutually and therefore they are often cxprest fcy
is
Thus
Aristotle,
287
ft* 1 -
THE
#o, is
Dative, as
employed
to
it
IV
;
denote the
the Cause
tuitous,
FINAL CAUSE,
which
may
TIB i
Submittit flores
Lucret.
TIB i
Scorpius
Virg. G.
serviat ultima Thule.
I.
TIBI
Ibid.
AND
so
;
their Origin
and Use
TO
>
01-
(Jtn-
illiquid,
rim, servi
dominm
et
288
Ch. IV. tions,
HERMES.
which we could not well h) over, from the r great importance both in the Greek and Latin Tongues; but which however, not being among the Essentials of Language, and therefore not to be found in ,many particular Languages, can be hardly said to fall
:
CHAP.
W Annon
nets
et ittud observations
dignum
(licet nobis
mo-
declinationum, casuum,
conjugationum,
fume /
modernas, his fere destitutas^ plurima per prccpositiones et verba auxiliaria segniter expedire ? Sane facile quis coyjiciat
multo acutiora
1*
et
subtU
CHAP.
V.
Concerning Interjections
Recapitulation Conclusion.
Ch. v.
v^%^*
Kind among the Greeks are 'Q, #*, A/, &c. among the Latins, Ah! Heu ! Hei ! Sec. among
JECTION.
this
Of
the English, Ah ! Alas ! Fie ! &c. These the Greeks have ranged among their Adverbs ; improperly, if we consider the
Adverbial
which it always serves in the character of an Attributive. Now INTERJECTIONS co-incide with no Part of
pal,
and
to
Speech, but are either uttered alone, or else thrown into a Sentence, without altering
its
Form,
tion.
done better
separating them
by
themselves,
f Vid. Servmm
in
Mntid XII.
v.
486.
290
V. themselves,
HER M E S.
and giving them a name by
the
rest.
SHOULD
it
be ask'd,
?
OF NATURE, rather than Voices of Art, expressing those Passions and natural Emotions, which spontaneously arise in the human Soul, upon the View or
Narrative of interesting
AND
(*)
Et recte quidem
de
m,
Sed quando
runtur^ ut nota affectus, velut suspirii aut metus, vix cf. dentur ad classem aliquam pertinere^ ut qua NATURALES
NOTJE ; non^ aliarum vocum mstar, ex instituto signiVoss. de Anal. L. I. c. 1. INTERJECTIO est Vo% ficant.
sint
etc
citra rerbi
opem sententiam
Con-
complens. Ibid. c. 3.
JECTIO.
Hiijus appettatio
non
similiter se habet ac
jitnctionis*,
.291
"
AND
ch V.
-
U2
"
FICANT,
juvctionis.
Nam
cum
quia conjun-
gat ; Interjectio tamen, non quia interjacet, sedquia inter/* ejus est^ ut inNee tamen de jicitur, nomen accepit.
terjiciatur ;
cum per se compleat sententiam, nee raro ab INTERJECTIOea incipiat oratio. Ibid. L. IV. c. 28. NEM non esse partem Orationis sic ostendo : Quod naturale
idem est apud omnes : Sed gemitus fy sigrttt l&titiat idem sunt apud omnes : Sunt igitur naturales. Si vero Nam ece partes y naturaleS) non sunt paries Orationis.
est)
secundum Aristotelem^ ex instituto^ non natura^ debent constare. Interjectionem Greed ddverbiis adnumerant ;
sedfalso.
Nam
neque^ Sac.
Sarict.
Miner. L.
I. c.
2.
INTERJECTIONEM
hcec
subaudiun-
tur.
Ut
si
dicam
Papae
pae
Miror
bi significationem.
tium Scriptores separatim hanc partem ab Adverbiis accipere ; quia videtur affectum habere in sese Verbi^ et pie-
qua
XV.
'
292
Ch. V.
li
ERME-S.
that
"
FICANT,
WHEN ASSOCIATED
" and are called for that reason SUB" STANTIVES and ATTRIBUTIVES " that the Substantives are either NOUNS
"or PRONOUNS
that
the
ATTRIBUor
TIVES
"
"
66
are either
that
PRIMARY
the
SE-
"CONDARY
PLES, or
dary,
Primary Attri-
ADVERBS
when
are either
DEFINITIVES
" or
CONNECTIVES that the Dejinitives are either ARTICULAR or PRO" NOMINAL and that the Connectives " are either PREPOSITIONS or CON" JUNCTIONS/'
AND
thus have
we
r
resolved
LAN-
AS A
WHOLE
293
we proposed,
of this Inquiry.
W
we conclude, methinks
BUT now
I hear
as
an
air
" there no speaking then without all this " trouble ? Do we not talk every one of " as learned as as well
us,
unlearned,
" well poor Peasants, as profound Philo" sophers?" We may answer by interrogating on our part Do not those same poor Peasants use the Lever and
the
Instru?
'-
ments, with
much
habitual readiness
And
those
Geometrical
which
ficacy
and Force
And
is
U3
(*)
occur
See before ; p. 7.
294
Ch.v.
HERMES.
occur every day of Time, of Place, and of Motion of Light, of Colours, and of Gravitation of our very Senses
and
by which we perceive every thing else THAT they are, we all know, and are perfectly satisfied
Intellect,
they are, is a Subject of much obscurity and doubt. Were we to reject this last Question, because we are certain of the first, we should banish all
WHAT
a graver Objector now accosts " What us. (says he) is the UTILITY ? "Whence the Profit, where the Gain?"
BUT
Use.
Arithmetic
is
ex-
cellent
ayv<ur0T<XTjy
iros.
ryv
ueriotv'
utyKEg yrs
yot.g
KIVYHTIS,
/X.EV tlvoti
o ro-
ETI
/!AoAXov o fflovos.
'Exaf8
E
reruv TO
yvw-
rts
-nrorE
TIV
avruv *
?
tsarix.
v>
ruv
i^\v
.
ffurdruv
yOtf*
oga9yv<zi.
E^i SE
ri rvv roizruv
-^v^n' TO
tlVXt Tl
TW
xJ/y^fJV,
yVWgtfAMTOLTOV
1
tyatVSgUTOlTOV'
Tl 01 HJOTS
If iv,
p. 142.
pfitvv
xarxfAaQw.
'AXslavS .
'A(p^o. Usgt
295
the gauging of Liquors ; Ch. V. Geometry, for the measuring of Estates ; Astronomy, for the making of Alma-
nacks
THUS much
to
the Sordid
If the
Liberal ask for something better than this, we may answer and assure them
Vigour.
Be
ploy, and we become abler Actors iu the Drama of Life, whether our Part
be of the
Jdnd.
busier,
or
of the
sedate?
U4
PERHAPS
HERMES.
PERHAPS
to
too there
is
a Pleasure even
which
it
may be
farther conducive.
own
sakes, tho'
we
happen not
ters
their intrinsic
Worth
also,
tho'
not condemned to
Good (could we have the Grace to recognizp it) in the mere Energy of our
Intellect, as
much
?
as in
Energies of
believes
lower degree
there
is
The Sportsman
in his
Good
Chace
the
Man
of Gaiety, in his Intrigue ; even, the Glutton, in his Meal. may justly ask of these, why they pursue such
We
things ; but if they answer, they pursue them, because they are GOOD, it
would be
folly
to
WHY
might
GOOD.
It
be replied on
their
297
-
their behalf (how strange soever it may Ch V. at first appear) that if there was not
something
in no respect
USEFUL, even things useful themselves For could not possibly have existence. this is in fact no more than to assert,
that
some things
are
ENDS,
some
things are
MEANS, and
that if there
NO MEANS.
IT should seem then the Grand Question was,
WHAT
is
GOOD
is
what
is
that which
that
something else, but for itself; for whether it be the Chace, or the Intrigue, or the
Meal,
agreed,
may be
for for
Country, 3
298
Ch. v.
'
HERMES.
Country, others for
indolent,
Town
some, easy,
and soft ; others, boisterous, a multitude diveractive, and rough sified to every taste, and which for the
;
time are enjoyed as PERFECT GOOD, without a thought of any End, that may be farther obtained. Some Objects of
this
,
kind are at times sought by all men, excepting alone that contemptible
Means
of life wholly forgetting its End, are truly for that reason called Misers, or
Miserable.
IF there be supposed then a Pleasure,
a Satisfaction, a Good, a Something valuable for its self without view to any
thing farther, in so many Objects of the subordinate kind ; shall we not allow
the same praise to the sublimest of all Objects ? Shall THE INTELLECT alone
no pleasures in its Energy, when we allow them to the grossest Energies of Appetite, and Sense? Or if the Reality of all Pleasures and Goods were
feel
2,99
Ch. V.
may
be defended, as rationally Whatever may be as any of them? urged in behalf of the rest (for we are
may
safe-
INTELLECTUAL GOOD,
;
that
" the Goodof that it is Fart, which is " most excellent within us that it is a
Good accommodated to all Places " and Times which neither depends ; " on the will of others, nor on the af" fluence of external Fortune that it ; " is a Good, which decays not with " decaying Appetites, but often rises " in when those are no more.
".
vigour,
THERE
is
a Difference,
we must
MORAL VIRTUE,
See Vol.
I. p.
3GG
Ch,v.
H E R M E S.
human Lifer. But INTELLECTUAL VIRTUE may be surely called more DIVINE, if we conpetites to the purposes of
sider the
its
End.
INDEED
petites,
for
Moral
Virtue, as
it
is
and
Affections, either to
to
re-
a proper Mean, or totally to expel the unnatural and vitious, it would be impious
to suppose
THE DEITY
to have occa-
any
work of
this
kind should
attention.
Yet
GOD
Is,
and LIVES.
it
If
we may
jecture
ENERGY
SBQUT
301
Ch. V.
EOS ds<,
et os
%'
uos, jc
"n
a>?i
yjti'
y^f NS
Ivl^ys/a, Qu'n'
'ExEiVoy 2f,
fi
fyy
ot,% <VJ
(^(n>v)
a.i$tos.
4>a//,sv ^f
txiotov, olgifov'
o's't
jc
a/wv O'yw^^j' c
&tu
A',
It
is
remarkable
terized as
in Scripture that
imaginary Deities,
Life at
all
;
Gop peculiarly characGOD ? in opposition to all false and of whom some had no pretensions to
others to
;
bles or Brutes
none higher than that of Vegetaand the best were nothing better than
existence
illustrious
Men, whose
was circumscribed by
302
Ch. V.
HERMES.
induced one of the wisest among the Ancients to believe " That the Man,
"
who could
his
live
in the
pure enjoy"
ment of
Mind, and who properly cultivated that divine Principle, was " happiest in himself, and most beloved by " the Gods. 'For if the Gods had any " to what passed among Men regard " (as it appeared they had) it was pro" bable they should " which was most
rejoice in
that.
excellent,
and by na-
" ture the most nearly allied to them"selves; and, as this was MIND, that " they should requite the Man, who " most loved and honoured both
This,
" from his regard to that which was o " dear to themselves, and from his act" ing a Part, which was laudable and
right
AND
may be added
'A-JTOV
To
another,
von
o v5$-
VOJT' voyros
y<x-
303
there
is
AND
thus in
all
SCIENCE
ch V.
-
it
is
HER-
305
HERMES
OR
A PHILOSOPHICAL ENQUIRY
UNIVERSAL GRAMMAR.
BOOK
Introduction
its
III.
CHAR L
Division of the Subject into principal Parts.
oOME
thro' the
things
the
MIND
performs
Ch.l.
*****
BODY
as for
Works and Energies of Art. Others it performs without such Medium ; as for example, when it thinks, and rearious
sons,
and concludes.
in either case,
Now
tho' the
Mind,
may be
called the
more
306
Ch.L
H;ERMES.
more properly
innate Powers.
ulti-
mately the Cause of all ; of every thing at kast that is Fair and Good.
AMONG
those Acts of
its
Mind more
own, that of mental Separation may be well reckoned one. Corporeal Separations, however accurate
immediately
otherwise, are in one respect incomplete, as they may be repeated without end.
The
pose any instrument equal to such dissection) has still a triple Extension of
length, breadth,
figure,
and thickness
has a
other qualities and so will continue to have, tho' thus divided to infinity. But
to
the
Mind surmounts
all
power of Concretion ,
( fl )
Itaque Natures
;
ratio
Sf Scpanon per Ignem certe^ sed per Mentem^ tanquam Bacon. Organ. Lib. II. 1(3. / cllrmum.
fadenda
est
prorsus Solutio
307
in the simplest
itself,
con-
its
Accidents; as
tho' they
had
AND
thus
it is
that
it
penetrates into
conspicuous Parts, but persisting, till it even separate those Elementary Principles,
which, being blended together after a more mysterious manner, are united
much
as in the
W mightiest Whole.
Now
among
if
MATTER
and
FORM
are
Elements, and deserve perhaps to be esteemed as the principal among them, it may not be foreign to
these
'
308
HERMES.
ther these, or any thing analogous to them, may be found in SPEECH of LAN-
GUAGE. W
tempt
This therefore
we
shall at-
method.
EVERY
( c>
See before, p. 2. 7.
Greek
MATTER and FORM (in TAH and EIAO2) were Terms of great import in
when
things
were
scruti-
They
regarded by modern Philosophy, which almost wholly employs itself about the last order of Substance, that is to say, the tangible, corporeal or concrete^ and which acknowledges no separations even
little
Chemical Process.
The
a
original
meaning of the
WOOD.
Thus Homer,
x
TAH,
As Neptune past, the Mountains and the WOOD Trembled beneath the God's imrtiortal Feet.
Hence
I
as
WOOD
first
Word
"TA*J,
which denoted
:nre to be by degrees extended, and at length to denote MATTER or MATERIALS in general. In this sense Brass
is called the
TA>?
BOOK THE
THIJRD.
309
Ch.
I.
EVERY
com-
and so
in other instances.
The
Latinity use
SYLVA under
prehensive Signification.
t
Now as
Metal,
life,
$c.) occur most frequently in common and are all nothing more than natural Substances or
Wood,
Bodies, hence by the Vulgar, MATTER and BODY have been taken to denote the same thing ; Material to mean
Corporeal', Immaterial, Incorporeal, &c.
But
this
was
not the Sentiment of Philosophers of old, by whom the Term Matter was seldom used under so narrow an acceptation.
By
was
called
Words
The
of our
own power (r ax Ip' ^v) such as Wealth and Poverty, Honour and Dishonour, Health and Sickness,
Life
310
HERMES.
compounded of something COMMON,
and something PECULIAR; of something
YAa/, O r Materials of Virtue or Moral Goodness, which had its essence in a proper conduct with respect to all these, (Vid. Arr. Epict. L. 1. c. 29. Also Vol. the first of these miscellaneous
Treatises,
p.
187, 309.,
M. Ant. XII.
and
*Airiu<$ss
X.
18, 19.
where the
'TPUKOV
to each other.) The Peripatetics, tho' they expressly held the Soul to be a.o-u^xros^ or Incorporeal, yet still talked of a N* 'TX/>co* ? a material Mind or Intellect. ~
may
as
possibly sound
somewhat
Yet
if
we
translate the
human Knowledge,
yet necessary to
its
recep-
tion
there seems nothing then to remain, that can give us offence. And so much for the Idea ot TAH, or MAT-
TER.
See Alex. Aphrod. dc Amm. p. 144. b. 145. Arist. Prod, in Mctaph. p. 121, 122, 141. Edit. Sylb.
Euclid, p. 22, 23.
As
to
ElAOS ?
its
original
or FIGURE, considered as denoting visible Symmetry, and Proportion ; and hence it had its name from Ei$# to
see,
Thus Euripides,
ctt-io'v
Fair
FORM
to
Empire gave
311
X4
by
Now
as the
Form
Name and
Essence; hence in
was peculiar,
cession to
essential,
and
distinctive, so as
by
its
ac-
any them with a Character, which they had not before, was called by the Antients EIAOS or FORM. Thus not only
the Shape given to the Brass
Beings, as to its"r>o> or
Matter , to mark
was
Form
Drugs
df the Statue
the orderly
Mothe
the ElSw or
Form of
Dance
os
the just
or
Form
tional
all
and accurate Conduct of a wise and good many in the various Relations and Occurrences of life, made
that E]>s- or
FORMAM
HONESTI
Form, described by Cicero to his Son, quidam ipsam^ Marce fili^ et tanquam faciem
De Offic.
I.
We may go farther still- THE SUPREME INTELLIGENCE, which passes thro' all things, and which is the same to our Capacities, as Light is to our Eyes, this supreme Intelligence .has
as being the
all
been called EIAO2 EIAON, THE FORM OF Fountain of all Symmetry, of all
Truth
and
as imparting to
etey
312Ch.
I.
HERMES.
by which
to
it is
distinguished, and
self.
made
be
its
true
and proper
HENCE
Being those
and
essential
itself,
distinctive Attributes,
else.
which
make
it
to be
And
of
so
as before concerning
MATTER.
We
shall
and be
at
an end
that while
the two co-exist, they co-exist not by juxta-position, like the stones in a wall, but by a more intimate Coincidence, complete in the minutest part
that hence, if
we were
to persist in dividing
every section both Matter and Form, and these as perfectly united, as before the Division began they are both pre-existent to the Beings,
lastly, that
constitute
at large
the Form,
if
Artificer, or
Pulchrum pulcherrimus
ipse
Mundum
Even without
we may
see
animal and vegetable Substances, the Form pre-existing in their immediate generating Cause ; Oak
among
all
Oak ? Lion
of Lion,
Man
of
Man,
Cicero's
313
Ch.i.
HENCE LANGUAGE, if compared according to this notion to the murmurs of a Fountain, or the dashings of a Cataract, has in common this, that like
them,
it is
SOUND.
*?
is
as follows.
MATTER.
Sed subjectam putant omnibus
rentem omni
tatius hoc
ilia
verbum
MATERIAM quondam, ex
:
qua omnia
(quce tota
omnia ac*
omni cipere possit, omnibusque modis mutari atque ex etiam zitferire, non in nihilum, &c. parte) ebque
Acad.
I. 8.
FORM,
Sed ego
sic statuo,
neque ullo sensu percipi potest : cogitatione tantum et mente complectimur. HAS RERUM FORMAS appeltat
Ideas ille non intelligendi solum, sed etiam dicendi gravissimus auctor et magister, Plato : easque gigni negat, et
*
ait
semper
esse,
ac ratione et
intelligentia
contineri
ccetera nasci,
et
uno
eodem
statu.
Quidquid
est
ad uUimam
Cic. ad
sui generis
Formani
M.
Brut. Orat.
314
Ch.
I.
HERMES.
has in peculiar this, that whereas those Sounds have no Meaning
contrary
it
MEAN-
mon
ing.
this,
from them, that whereas the Meaning of those Animal Sounds is derived from NATURE, that of Language is derived, not from Nature, but
distinguish
from COMPACT.^
FROM
(d)
The
Words as of Sentences, made it a of their character to be significant xara awQnn, by part Boethius See Aristot. de Interp. c. 2. 4. Compact.
definitions as well of
translates the
Words xtnx
comment
SECUNDUM PLACITUM
women
unquam,
sicut
subject a res
a natura
e^t^ ita
vocabulo numupatur.
wic, ct
Sed hominum genus, quod ct railoratione vigerct, nomina posiiit) eaquc quibus
libuit
315
FROM hence it becomes evident, that LANGUAGE, taken in the most comprehensive view, implies certain Sounds, having certain Meanings ; and that of these
is
as the
MATTER, common (like other Matter) to many different things; the MEANING as that peculiar and characteristic FORM, by which the Nature or Essence of Language becomes complete.
CHAR
libuit literis
rerum
p. 308.
fukstantiis dedit.
316
HERMES.
CHAP,
Upon
the Matter, or
II.
Ch. II
-
J[
-y
comes first to be considered, a Subject, which Oder will not* suffer us to omit, but in which we shall endeavour to be
as concise as
Matter
is
Sensation peculiar to the Sense of Hear-* ing, when the Air hath felt a Percussion,
adequate
to the
As
()This appears to be Pristiarfs Meaning when hetrue of SOUND, says of a VOICE, what is more properly
}n general, that
it is
swm
sensibile
I. p.
aurium^ id
est,
quod
Lib.
The
cause of
circularly',
SOUND to an Undulation in the Air propagated as when we drop a stone into a Cistern of
water,
317
are
Sound derives
FARTHER,
ther
Animal
or Inanimate, so the
two
THERE
is
no peculiar
Name
for
for that of
Animals, when made by the trampling of their Feet, the fluttering of their Wings, or any other Cause, which is
merely
modern Hypothesis,
'
and to be
as plausible as
any
us
tytjvovvros
ra
atx.vovros ot^os BT
inter loquentem^ et auzV, qiii medius aer verberatur orbiculariter^ delude agitatiis est, auribus influit, quemadmodum et dsternce aqua per orbes
318
Ch. n.
II
ER
ME
But
S.
merely accidental.
make
Nature and Powers of the Human Voice, is in fact to know THE MATTER or common Subject
perceive that
to
know
the
of Language.
abroad.
WHAT
are,
is
not in
formed, before ever and can therefore (as well as Breathing) find a Passage thro' the Nose, when the
is
Mouth
is
least utterance.
pure and simple VOICE, being thus produced, is (as before was observed) transmitted to the Mouth. HERE
Now
CULATION.
Character, acquired
means of
the
Mouth
Organs, the Teeth, the Tongue, the Lips. &c. The Voice is not by Articulation
or acute,
its
more
lities)
primary Qua-
320
Ch.
II.
HERMES.
Hties)
but
perfectly adapted to
exist
along with
THE
(*)
The
several
the purposes of Speech, but those very different ones likewise of Mastication and Respiration ; so frugal is Nature in thus assigning them double duty, and so
careful to maintain her character of doing nothing in
vain.
He, that' would be informed, how much better the Parts here mentioned are framed for Discourse in Man,
a Discursive Animal, than they are in other Animals, who are not so, may consult Aristotle in his TreaLib. III. c. 1. 3. tise cfe Animal. Part. Lib. II. c. 17.
tslio is
De Anima.
L. II.
c. 8.
23, &c.
if
And here by
the way,
truly modern, he
may
in pher, considering (as it is modestly phrased) the Age which he lived, should know so much, and reason so well.
But
he have any taste or value for antient literature, he may with much juster cause wonder at the Vanity of
if
his
Contemporaries,
Invention of their
Antients
so ready
Still
who dream all Philosophy to be the own Age, knowing nothing of those
themselves.
The
321
ChIj. simplest of these new Characters are those acquired thro' the mere Openings
THE
will
shew
what authority we have to distinguish VOICE from mere SOUND ; and ARTICULATE VOICE from SIMPLE VOICE.
v tisgos ateQ-nrw
orxv
o
<$toc.
rv>s <7vroA?j*
cl(T9ryi;0E
rw
rys
v
vps'
Ta;J
OTTE^
EW;
rcv
/x-CTVEffay
o^yavwv crvyJ^ctm^
oSovrwy,
J^
6/ov otvhuv
^
//.
p^E/At^y -CT^OJ
^E
THN
AIAAEKTON
avayKa/a'v
OVTWV,
t
yfos-
THN
cravra;? erv^x\Xo{A.ivuv
audit u sentitur
Vox
animans
edit)
quam
aspe-
rum
ictu
vacant, et
per/kit.
eiAtrrivrot,
cum lingua, denies, labiaque ad loquelam necessaria sintjadvocem vero simplicem non omnino con-
ferant.
Ammon.
in Lib.
It
the
322
Ch.Il.
j
HERMES.
ngs of the Mouth, as these Openings differ in giving the Voice a Passage. It
the Variety of Configurations in these
is
Openings only, which gives birth and origin to the several VOWELS ; and
hence
it is
Name, by
THERE
are
other
articulate
Forms,
which the Mouth makes not by mere Openings,, but by different Contacts of
its different
it
makes
Lips,
the Peripetetics) used the word $fiNH to denote SOUND in general. They defined it therefore to be To J'cW
/cr0?To axoTj^j
which
*
justifies
by
Prisdan^ in the
defined to be
Note preceding.
og^y* Tzmtoy pivos, Air struck (anel some animal impulse ; and HUMAN so made audible) by
VTFQ
A ^<?>
or
defined
"EvagQgos K,
a^S
Sietvoiocs IxntftTroiAiw.,
articulate
itisGiirsive faculty.
(c)
323
Now
unless
some Opening of the Mouth either immediately precede, or immediately follow, would rather occasion
than to
Silence,
produce
Voice
hence
it is,
that with
ing, either previous or subsequent, they are always connected. Hence also it
is,
that the Articulations so produced are called CONSONANT, because they sound
not of themselves, and from their own powers, but at all times in company with
some auxiliary
THERE
enough
Y2
all
324
Ch.lL
HERMES.
a [i denoted by the
ELEMENT/
6)
in as
culation of every other kind is from them derived, and into them resolved.
Under
their smallest
Syllable
;
Combination they
Syllables properly
produce a
combined produce a Word ; Words properly combined produce a Sentence ; and Sentences properly combined produce an Oration or Discourse.
AND
Ce
>The
Stoic Definition of
an ELEMENT
is that,
is
as follows
els o
An. ELEMENT
made, and into which, as their last remains, they are resolved. Diog. Laerl. VII. 176. What Aristotle says upon ELEMENTS with
respect to the Subject here treated,
(rvyxsiTxi w
sis
is
worth attending to
KJ
sis oi
^nx.i^ti'con
fy&jvvi,
ru
si^st
dvruv,
those things^
VOICE
it
is
is
Metaph. V.
c. 3.
325
AND
thus
it is
Y3
been
W The Egyptians
tor of Letters,
and Regulator of Language, whom they called THEUTH. By the GREEKS he was worshipped under the Name of HERMES, and represented commonly
by a Head
tiful
upon
quadrilateral Basis.
The Head
it
itself
was
that of a beau-
Youth, having on
There was & peculiar reference in this Figure to the *EPMHZ AOriOZ, THE HERMES OF LANGUAGE OR
DISCOURSE.
He
human
figure but the HEAD, because no other was deemed requisite to rational Communication. Words at the same time,
the
medium
Homer well
were
re-
by
th<e
WINGS
of his Bonnet.
his
Let us suppose such a HERMES, having the Front of Basis (the usual place for Inscriptions) adorned with
some old Alphabet, and having a Veil Jlung across, by which that Alphabet is partly covered. Let A YOUTH
this
Veil ;
Sucfc
326
H E R M E S.
been sufficient to explain the Sentiments of so innumerable a Multitude, as all the present and past Generations of Men. IT
easily indicate its Meaning. might imagine to be THE GENIUS OF MAN (Natitrcc Dens humance^ as Horace stiles him ;) THE NYMPH to be MNHMO2YNH, or MEMORY ; as much as
THE YOUTH we
to insinuate that
<c
" MAX,
;
for the
Preservation of his
have
" a
LETTERS
and that
MEMORY,
scions of her
own
Insufficiency,
was glad to
<< self
of so valuable an Acquisition."
well
MR. STUART,
known
Edition of the Antiquities of Athens, has adorned this Work with a Frontispiece agreeable to the above Ideas',
and that
possesses
in
As
to
Figure, $c.
Serran.
his History, Genealogy, Mythology, Vid. Plalon. Phileb. T. II. p. 18. Edit.
Diod.Sic.lu.l.
Horat. Od. X. L.
1.
Ilesiod.
Thcog. V. 937. cum Comment. Joan. Diaconi. Thucid. VI. 27. ct Scholiast, in lac. Pighium apud Grotwv. Thcsaur. T. IX. p. 1164.
For
Elench.
difficulty
c.
them,
see Aristot.
de Sophist.
34.
The
327
THE MATTER
or
COMMON SUB-
WHAT
the
remains to be examined in
Chapter,
to say,
following
its
under
characteristic
is
is
FORM,
that
Language
Meaning.
Y4
The
CHAR
following Passage, taken from that able Mathe. matician Tacquet, will be found peculiarly pertinent to
Elementary
qu&que contineret dtversos or dines lifcrarum 24. Tacquc$ Edit. Antvcrp, 1663. Arithmetics Theor. p. 381.
328
II
ER
M E S.
CHAR
Upon
the
III.
Language.
WHEN to any
is
Words, possessing
(as it were)
unite in constituting A
PARTICULAR
IT
LANGUAGE,
p.
314.
<<>.
1.
The
able
Ammonius
is
remarkT*
E
Ka0<3S7r>
TO
/xtv
(fivcrst,
og
XtieQ&i, Ssesi
SiiTEi*
t
KCLTO. <rvvQwwv, x^
TO
8Tw
ovofcaTwv
10
329
-
IT appears from hence, that A WORD ch ni may be defined a Voice articulate, and
significant
GUAGE
Voices, so significant.
IT
ing
is
from notions
ts
Ix.
aAoyo<? fyois' TO Se
Aoyo<*
ovo/
TUTUY
o-vyxEf/x-lvo/s-
^ya-Qai
*&% os ryv
ra,
vsgysiv
vvx[Avr)s,
<
ovrw rw
$io(,x.givv)T&i ISvvxiAis'
5fA(r/ ^e
rocvrae, ot slf
In the same manXoyo; perx (Aerguv, n oivsv f/Jrguv. nvr therefore, as local Motion is from Nature^ but Daneing
is
but a
Door
is
something positive ; so
ducing a vocal
Sound founded
in
And
vocal
to
hence
it
is,
Sound (which is as it were the Organ or Instrument the $&uFs faculties of Knowledge or Volition) as to this
power 1 say, manner as
vocal
Man
in like
irrational animals
330
Ch.
III.
HER M E
the of
S.
Words
Images
all
particulars.
AND
yet
it
may
Images are
all
of them Imitations,
will
tiring thus
employed being founded not in Nature^ but in Position) this he seems to possess by tcaij of peculiar eminence^ because he alone of all mortal Beings partakes of a Soul y
tchich can
move
even in the
and operate artificially ; no that Subject of Sound his artificial Pozcer sheiks
itself ,
abundantly prove.
Amman,
dc,
must be observed, that the operating artificially,, (cvEfysr? rs^vuus) of which Ammoniits here speaks, and
It
which he considers
as
a distinctive
Mark
peculiar to the
Human
Soul, means something yery different from themcre producing works of elegance and design ; else it
could never be a
mark
of Distinction between
as
Man,
the /Bee
See Vol.
I.
p. 8, 9, 1(X
158, 159,
&f
331
Ch.
III.
faculties to
know
by
know
also
Imitations.
lows, that
But
it
should
or
that reason
its
Greek
Truth is, that every Medium through which we exhibit any thing to another's Contemplation, is either derived from Natural Attributes, and then it is an IMITATION; or else from Accidents quite arbitrary,
THE
and then
it is
SYMBOL.^)
Now,
*)
A'*pe'fe< SE TO
OMOIOMA
OLVTVIV
rS
SYMBOAOT,
xatToi
riu,7v
xzQoaov TO
TO
o[j.oi-u[j.ot.
TV? tyvcrw
TU wg/iyiAXTos
tV'v Ifi
9xi
j3ATa<,
ex.
etvro
o/xo/w/xa,
I; /x*j
ro jag
Iv
T'/J
sixwi yfy^/x/xEVtt T
2&;x^Ty
'
TO
tis
ye
UTO
ovo/xce^e/)
TO oAov 1^'
oJov,
i5
Itrtvol^cs'
332
Ch. in.
HER M E
Now,
if
it
S.
the greater part of things, not any of their natural Attributes are to be found
in
articulate
Voices,
through such Voices things of every kind are exhibited, it will follow that WORDS must of necessity be SYMBOLS,
because
it
Imitations.
here occurs a Question, which " deserves attention Why, in the eom" mon intercourse of men with
BUT
men,
Symbols
ns
.
-A.
RKPIIKSKNTATION or
in as
RESEMBLANCE
Resemblance
differs
from
SYMBOL,
much
as the
aims as far as possible to represent the very nature of the nor is it in our pozccr to shift or van/ it. Thus ft tiring^
in a Picture,, if
it
333
Symbols preferred, although Symbols are only known by Habit or Institution, while Imitations are
recognized a kind of natural Intuition ?" by To this it may be answered, that if the
" "
Sentiments of the Mind, like the Features of the Face, were immediately visible to every beholder, the Art of
Speech or Discourse would have been But now, while perfectly superfluous. our Minds lie inveloped and hid, and
the
Body
(like
Thoughts,
the flat -nosed,
and
the
But
SYMBOL or
Philosopher Aristotle uses both names) is our own power, as depending singly for its exwholly in
tJie
SIGN (for
to the
Symbol or Sign
may
Torch, (according to what Euripides says, But when the flaming Torch was hurl'd, the sign
Of purple Jight as when the Trumpet sounds, &c.) one may suppose the elevating of a Spear, the dartAmmon. ing of a Weapon, and a thousand ways besides.
,
or
else
in Lib.
de Interp,
p. 17. b.
334
Ch.
III.
HERMES.
Thoughts to convey them
through a
to
is
each other
corporeal^
Medium which
it is
And hence
that
all Signs,
Marks,
the Senses.
W Now
Eye
THE SENSES, we
their natural Li;
the
perceives no Sounds
by Symbols but by
Imitations,
by
Figure
(c)
A!
4" y
/'
%a
'
//,EV
Serai rivv
ai)[Aivstv
aX>wAa/s
roc,
avrwt TO
"^nKxfs
vos^ov,
>o<ra
ru/v
ovoporuv,
uv
creti
ra OTy/!x.aT. Animi nostri a corporis compage seres vicissim animi conceptionibus significare possent :
corporibus involuti sint^ perinde ac nebula ipso:
cum autem
rum
Ammon.
in Prae*
dicam. p. 18,
(
a.
d}
sasy
tia
illoe
gitatwjium de homine in
.
Jwmmem.
Bacon, de
Augm;
VI.
1.
BOOK:
THE THIRD.
335
Ch.
Figure and Colour, our Imitation would be necessarily thro* Figure and Colour
HL
Again, as far as they are characterized by Sounds, it would for the same reason be thro" the Medium of
also.
Sounds.
The
like
may be
said of all
the other Senses, the Imitation still shifting along with the Objects imitated
We
see then
how
tation
would prove.
set
IF
we
LANGUAGE
therefore, as
Symbol, in opposition to such Imitation ; if we reflect on the Simplicity of the one, and the Multiplicity of the other;
consider the Ease and Speed, with which Words are formed (an Ease which
if
we
knows no trouble or fatigue and a *Speed, which equals the Progress of our very Thoughts) if we oppose to this the difficulty and length of Imitations if we remember that some Objects are
; ;
capable of no Imitations at
-all
all,
but that
typified
Objects universally
;
may be
by Symbols
* Zvtx
we may
plainly perceive
an
altgwrv
See before, p 325,
136
Ch. Hi.
H E R M E S.
an .Answer to the' Question here pro^
" Why, in the common inter* posed, " course of men with men, Imitations " have been and
rejected,
Symbols pre*
" ferred."
perceive a Reason, why there never was a Language,nor indeed can possibly be framed one, to extoo
press the Properties and real Essences of things, as a Mirrour exhibits their Fi-
HENCE
we may
For if Langures and their Colours. guage of itself imply nothing more, than
certain Species of Sounds with certain Motions concomitant ; if to some Beings
are no Attributes at
many others, where Attributes, they are no way essential (such as the Murmurs and Wavings of a Tree during
if to
be any way imitated, while between the Medium and themselves there is nothing
CONNATURAL^.
to See Vol. I, Treatise II.
c. 3. p.
70.
33?
III.
IT
is
were once established, it was easy to follow the Connection and Subordination of Nature, in the just deduction
Thus of Derivatives and Compounds. the Sounds, Water, and. Fire, being once annexed to those two Elements,
it
call
Beings participating of the first, Watry, of the last, Fiery, than to commute the
Terms, and
them by the reverse. But why, and from what natural Concall
it
not be commuted,
will
might be found, I
most
Others.
Reason,
in
Nature
Symbols of which
Words
THE
If
338
Ch.
ill.
HER
jf
it
ME
S.
be answered, of
of Sense, the various particular Beings, which exist around us -to this, it is replied,
may be
first
In the
in
place every
Word
will
be
Now
if all
how came
omit proper Names, or at least to explain them, not from their own Art, but from History ?
AGAIN, if all Words are proper Names, then in strictness no Word can belong to
more than one Individual.
then, as Individuals are
But
if so,
infinite, to
make
and never to be attained by the wisest Men whose labours in Language upon this Hypothesis would be
;
Symbols,
339
Ch. in.
duals are not only infinite, but ever passing, that the Language of those, who
lived ages ago, will be as unknown now, as the very Voices of the Speakers. Nay
Language of every Province, of every Town, of every Cottage, must be every where different, and every where changing, since such is the Nature of
the
Individuals,
which
it
follows.
upon the
;
Hypothesis
nor
any Affirmative
340
Ch.
III.
HERMES.
but Particular Negatives. But if so, then is Language incapable of communicating General Affirmative Truths If so, then of communicating Demonstration
communicating which are so many Systems of Sciences, Demonstrations If so, then of communicating Arts which are theTheorems
of Science applied practically
If so,
If so, then of
we
shall
be
little
better for
it
either in
Speculation or in Practice.^
And
so
much
for this
Hypothesis
let us
now
try another.
IF
WORDS
Symbols of
external Particulars,
follows of course,
they must be
IDEAS
For
this is evident, if
< e)
The whole
may be
cal-
founded upon Terms and general Propositions , most of which are general So true are those Verses, however barbaaffirmative.
rous as to their
stile,
Neve
341
-
HERB
SYMBOLS
must needs be
as
and mutable,
selves.
IF then
Words
Sym-
SYMBOLS
Aud what do we mean by GENERAL IDEAS ? We mean SUCH AS ARE COMMON TO MANY INDIVIthese, remains.
PUALS
342
Ch. IIL
HERMES,
now, but which existed in ages past, and will exist in ages future ; such
exist
example, as the Ideas belonging to the Words, Man, Lion,' Cedar. Admit
for
it,
It follows,
that
if Words are the Symbols of such general Ideas, Lexicographers may find employ,
may
be, not
common to many Particulars, past present and future so that however these Particulars may be infinite, and ei^er fleeting, yet Language notwithstanding may be But if so, then atdefinite and steady.
;
tainable even
by ordinary
Capacities,
the
Language
it
ago, as far as
may ^
be as
The
guage being accommodated to distant Regions, and even to distant Nations, amidst all the variety of ever new and
ever changing Objects.
AGAIN,
it
follows
that
Language
.
may be
and
if so,
become
Now
if it
^ these things could be asserted of Lan" guage, were not Words the Symbols " of general Ideas and it be further " be all that these
"
it
things may undeniably asserted of Language"will follow (and that necessarily) that
true,
Si'MBOLS OF GENE-
Z 4
AND
Note
(<?.
CO See before
344
Ch.
III.
II
ER
M E S.
AND
Words
Ideas,
are
the
Symbols of general
Language
may
answer
well
enough the purpose of Philosophers, who reason about general and abstract Subjects but what becomes of the business of ordinary Life ? Life we know is merged in a multitude of Particulars,
it
to no other
How
any Language be
End
in
answered, ih&tArts surely respect the business of ordinary Life ; yet so far are general Terms from
this it
To
may be
being an Obstacle here, that without them no Art can be rationally explainedinstance should the measuring Artist ascertain to the Reapers the price
How for
first
through
general
345
Ch.
III.
BUT
sist,
suppose
this
severing Objector
there were
still
minute particularizing, of which it zcas not possible for mere Generals to be sus-
That
the Objection
to the
was just
that
it
was
necessary
pressive of
general Terms are by far its most excellent and essential Part, since
that
which
learnt,
it
could
"
or
346
Ch.
ill.
H E R M E S<
" Science;"
their Utility
fore
and End, and that therecare too has been taken for a sup-
ply of these.
ONE Method
lars, is
is
the least
because proper
Names being
applied, may be unknown to those, who know the Language perfectly well, and
The other and more artificial Method is that of DEFINITIVES or ARTICLES/^ whether we
considered as parts of it.
And
here
we cannot
enough admire the exquisite Art of Language, which, without wandering into infinitude^ contrives how to denote
things
infinite
;
that
is
to say in other
properly applied
to
general
Terms,
te>
34?
expression of
explain what has been said by a Let the general Term single example.
To
be MAJST
have occasion to apply this Term to the denoting of some Particular. Let it be required to express
.
this Particular as
unknown ;
I say,
Man
nite
;
known
I say,
ANY Man
present
Man like present arid distant; THAT Man to some other SUCH A Man an indeMANY Men a definite finite Multitude
and near; THIS
; ;
Man
Multitude; A
THOUSAND Men
the ones
of a Multitude, taken throughout ; E v E u Y Man the same o?ies, taken until distinctions;
in order
&c.
the
ALL Men the Negation of this Multitude ; NO Man. But of this we have spoken already, when we in-
THE
348
Ch.
HERMES.
THE Sum
of
all is,
m.
that
WORDS
THE SYMBOLS OF IDEAS BOTH GENE* HAL AND PARTICULAR; YET OF THE GENERAL, PRIMARILY, ESSENTIALOF THE LY, AND IMMEDIATELY PARTICULAR, ONLY SECONDARILY, ACCIDENTALLY, AND MEDIATELY.
;
SHOULD
"
it
guage
this double
May
it
we not
ask,
by way
not
Now
we call that Perception intire and whole, which implies either INTELLECTION without Sensation, or SENSATION without Intellection ? If not, how should
Language explain
the whole of
our Per-
ception, had it not Words to express the Objects, proper to each of the two
Faculties
?
MATTER,
so here
so that
it
may be
defined
SYSTEM OF ARTICULATE VOICES, THE SYMBOLS OFOUR IDEAS, BUT OF THOSE PRINCIPALLY, WHICH ARE GENERAL
OR UNIVERSAL.
CHAP.
350
HER
ME
S.
CHAP.
iv.
having been said in the preceding Chapter about GENERAL OR UNIVERSAL IDEAS, it may not perhaps
iVlUCH
be amiss
come
we
of Beings they are ; since the generality of men think so meanly of their existence,
that they are commonly considered, as These Senlittle better than Shadows.
to perceive
them,
and
zshat kind
Philosopher now a da} s, and that from causes much the same with those, which
T
inliuence the
Vular.
from Infancy, and never once
in Sense
dreaming any thing to be worthy of pursuit, but what either pampers their Appetite, or fills their Purse, imagine no thin ff
but what
may be
tasted, or touched.
THE PHILOSOPHER,
higher,
ments,
if it
than
to
experimental Amuse-
of ascending from Sense to Intellect (the natural progress of all true Learning)
he hurries on the contrary into the midst of Sense, where he wanders at random without any end, and is lost in a Labyrinth of infinite Particulars.
Hence then
the reason
why
the sub-
AND
352
x
f
HE R M E
there
in
S.
Ch.lV, that
should
fashion,
still
remain
two
Sciences
their Certainty of all the least controverted, which are not in the minutest article
By
these I
concerning
1
GENERAL IDEAS.
-
MAN'S
(c)
(so useful in
life,
and
so admirable
-with
which
two PRINfrom
these
THE MOST OBVIOUS IMAGINABLE Principles, se> wanting the pomp and apparatus of EXPERIMENT^ that they are self-evident to every one, possessed of comCIPLES,
little
mon
sense.
in
what
hare
here said, or
may have
;
said elsewhere, to
under value
whose importance and utility I freely acknowledge, many curious Nostrums and choice
in the
EXPERIMENT
Receipts, with which it has enriched the necessary Arts of Life. Nay, I go farther I hold all justifiable Pracevery kind of Subject to Ue founded in EXPERIwhich is no more than the result of many repeated ENCE, EXPERIMENT*. But I must add withal, that the man who
tice in
acts
from Experience
is
but an Empiric or Quack^ and that nqt only in Medicine, but in every other Subject. It is then only that we recognize
ART, and
that .the
EMPIRIC
quits this
name
for
the
353
ch IV.
-
MAN'S
and transient than the very Objects, which they exhibit, because they not
,
only
SCIENCE, and
is
thence enabled to
tell
us,
not only,
;
WHAT
is
is to
be done> but
WHY
it is to
be done
for
ART
.
riding
In the mean time, while EXPERIMENT is thus necessary to all PRACTICAL WISDOM, with respect to PURE and SPECULATIVE SCIENCE,
the least to do.
as
we have
hinted already,
it
has not
metry ^ or Arithmetic being proved experimentally ? It is indeed by the application of these that Experiments are rendered useful ; that they are assumed into Philosophy,
it,
But
that these
Sciences themselves should depend upon the Subjects, on which they work, is, as if the Marble were to fashion
the Chizzle, and not the Chizzle the Marble,
Aa
351
Cb. IV. 011 ]y
HERM ES
depend upon the
existence of those
Objects, but because they cannot subsist, without their immediate Presence.
Hence
therefore
it is,
happily for us we are not deWe have in the first place serted here. a Faculty, called IMAGINATION or
BUT
as to
its
ener-
subsequent to Sense, yet is truly prior to it both in dignity and THIS it is which retains the fleetuse. ing Forms of things, when Things themselves are gone,
may be
and
all Sensation at
an
end.
THAT
this
ed with Sense,
perfectly different,
may
^
See liefore, p. 105.
may be
seen from hence. We have an ch Imagination of things, that are gone and
extinct;
but no such things can be made objects of Sensation. We have an easy command over the Objects of
our Imagination, and can call them forth in almost what manner we please; but our Sensations are necessary, when
their Objects are present, nor
can we
a2
As
GINATION, there are- two otfyer Faculties of the Soul, which from their nearer alliance ought carefully to be
distinguished from
j
it,
When we
of its
rise,
or referring
it to
any
is
PHANSY
or IMAGINATION.
When we
relict,
MEMORY.
lastly
HERMES.
As the
to
its
Wax
Power to retain, as well as to receive; the same holds of the SOUL, with respect
series
Lastly the Road., which leads to Memory through a of Ideas, however connected, whether rationally or
is
casually, this
RECOLLECTION.
I have
added
casually,
is
of-
ten sufficient.
its
Owner ;
thence of \^oods
ihence of Timber
Sec.
Memory and Phansy be not sufficiently understood, it may be illustrated by being compared to the view of a Portrait. When we con. template a Portrait, without thinking of whom it is the
If the Distinction between
Portrait, such Contemplation
is
analogous to PHANST.
When we
represents,
view
it
such
Contemplation
is
analogous to
whom it ME-
MORY.
We
is
may go
farther.
exhibit (after a
here that
manner) even things that are to come. It Hope and Fear paint all their pleasant and
all their
But
MEMORY
it
What
357
ch
-
its
receptive
Power
SENSE IMAGINATION,
Sense without
its
retentive.
Had
it
Imagination, it would not be as Wax, but as Water, where tho' all Impressions
may be
as
soon
lost.
made
THUS
Sense
we
a 3
Now"
What we have said may suffice for our present purHe that would learn more, may consult Aristot. tie AnimU) L. III. c. 3, 4. and his Treatise de Mem. el
pose.
Remimsc.
(d)
K.'JTO
i7
ro/vyy If^v
Y>
Qavlacria,
f
u$ av
yv&jg to-MifAW
&e(>\ vac,
r^
,
UCTO/AEVft Ti
CTW^T<,
otiltov
0V
U<7^S
crttifyfAtvov
ytvsroH' TO TO/TOV
358
Ch. IV.
HERMES.
Now
as our feet in vain venture to
walk upon the River, till the Fro&t bind the Current, and harden the yielding Surface; so does the SOUL in vain seek to exert its higher Powers, the Powers I Dean of REASON and IN-
TELLECT,
till
IMAGINATION
first
fix
the fluency of SENSE, and thus provide a proper Basis for the support of its
higher Energies.
AFTER
tCj
3>ANTA2IAN
KaXSovv.
Now what
the opera-
PHANSY
or IMAGINATION &, we
may
explain as follows.
We may
(as
it
from
were) or Picture
in
of that motion caused within us by the external oba relict^ which when the external object is no longer ject ; present j remains and is still preserved^ being as it were
relict
its
Image^ and which, by being thus preserved, becomes Memory. Now such a sort of re-
and (as it were) Impression they call PHANSY or IMAGINATION. Alex. Aphrod. de Anima, p. 135. b. Edit.
Aid.
.359
AFTER
subordinate
no Sensations, the Imagination could not operate ; and were there no Imagination,
there could be mither Reasoning nor Intellection, such at least as they are
found
in
their
Whether every
Intellect begins
;
thus,
may be
if
which " Intension and'Remis " sion and mere Capacity are unvine, to
"
knownW."
But not
to digress.
A
W See
DEITY.
162.
is
a 4
IT
p.
The
not a
Life, Energy,
little
or
Manner
of
MAN'S Existence
different
its
THE LIFE
OF
MAN
has
Essence in MOTION.
360
Ch. IV.
H
IT
is
S.
tasms that
first
works,
This is not only true with respect to that lower and subordinate Life, which he shares in common with Vegetables,
Fluids circulate,
which
first
peculiar to him as
Man.
faculties, and thence we move of ourselves either to Practice or Contemplation. But the LIFE or
more our
we can conjecture upon so transcendent a Subject) is not only complete throughout Eternity, but complete in every Instant, and is for that
EXISTENCE of
(as far as
GOD
MOTION.
when he
US
Ov y&g
VyE<#, aXAa
rtvd'
>
xivrKTst'
//.ET<3soAj
u<r7iEg
ivovvigiizv
yxg
"<j
fyuTis
is
;
vi
OO/LX,VJ //,TatoX>5J
7rtetKV)s.
For
there
not only an
in
MOTION ; Change
tf
all
things being sweet (according to the Poet) from a principle of Pravify in those who believe so. For in the same man-
ner
'
361
man
is
is
that
Nature bad
ture
is
&
Ethic.
Eudem. VI.
sub. Jin.
It is to this
that
Boethius refers,
when he
From
rived
as
Tempus ab
MANENS das
citncta
moveri.
IMMOBILITY,
may be
;
de-
such
that of IMPASSIVE,
&c.
7, 9, 10.
tises, p.
Du
266
Val.
I.
of these Trea-
262
to
also p. 295,
It
must be remembered however, that though we are as rational Beings we have within us some-
our mutable, variable, and irrational part, and our welfare in that Good, which is immutable, place
per-
362
Ch. IV. it discerns
;
HER M E
at once
S.
what
in
MANY
is
By
this
it
comes
to
behold akind
permanent, and rational, the higher we shall advance in This is (as an antient real Happiness and Wisdom.
writer says)
like to
coming
rt
'Q^oiuvis^ry Qsu xara TO ^watrov, the beGOD, as far as in our power. T Ts plv y&g
ro7s
Seots saois o
/3/^ ^aKOc-^i^-'
rys
For
is
to
THE GODS
(as
6iflo_MEN,
it
is
so far
happy ) as
rises to the
Arist. Eth.
X.
8.
(-O
This CONNECTIVE
Acts of
its
of the Soul, by which it perhaps one of the principal It is this removes that excellent Part. most
is
ACT
impenetrable mist, which renders Objects of Intelligence Were it not for this, even invisible to lower faculties.
the sensible
World
all
our Sensations)
would appear
It
is
as unconnected, as the
words of an Index.
Touch
alone,
nor the Odour alone, that makes the Rose, but it is inade up of all these, and other attributes UNITED ; not an unknown Constitution of insensible Parts, butakfiown
Constitution of sensible Parts, unless
we
chuse to extir-
WHAT
363
Ch. IV.
What
Can
it
then perceives
this
CONSTITUTION or UNION
Figure,
it
Sight also.
would not only be Smell, but it would be We It is the same in other instances.
X
LECTIVE POWER, to give us a prospect of Nature, even in these her subordinate Wholes., much more in that comprehensile Whole, whose Sympathy which these smaller Wholes are
Parts.
is
universal,
and of
than
all
no
more
But no where
is this
collecting,
and
(if I
may be
al-
Power more conlowed the expression) spicuous, than in the subjects of PURE TRUTH. By virtue of this power the Mind views One general Idea,
this unifying
in
many
Individuals ;
One Proposition
in
in
many
till
-general
Ideas ;
One Syllogism
many
Propositions ;
at length,
by properly ^repeating and connecting Syllogism with Syllogism, it ascend into those bright and steady regions
of SCIENCE.
venti,
Even
364
H E R M E S.
Race of Perceptions, each one of which
may
be found
intirc
and negative Conclusions cannot subsist, but by bringing Terms and Propositions together, so necessary is this UNITING Power to every
Even
negative Truths
Species of
KNOWLEDGE,
See p. 3. 250.
He
that
distinction be-
tween SENSITIVE PERCEPTION, and INTELLECTIVE, may observe that, w^en a Truth is spoken, it is heard by our Ears, and understood by our Minds. That these
different,
is
plain,
shew
their
difference
stronger,
us
suppose them to concur in the same Man, who shall Let both hear and understand the Truth proposed. the Truth be for example, The Angles of a Triangle
That this is ONE Truth, are equal to two right Angles. and not two or many Truths, I believe none will deny.
Let me ask then,
in
this
?
Truth be-
come
swer
perceptible
is
(if at all)
it
is
SENSATION
The Anlittle
is
obviaus
at a
by
successive portions of
and
all
little
Time.
When
;
the
first
Word
the last
present^
when
Word
is
present^
middle
previous are absent ; when are present^ then are there some absent^ as well of one sort as the other. No more exists at
the
any of the
Words
one
365
and whole
infinite
ah of an
is not)
once than a single Syllable, and the Remainder as much (to Sensation at least) as tho> it never had been,
And
so
much
of SENSE, than which we see nothing can be more And is that of the dissipated, Jieeting, and detached.
Mind
lows,
similar
Admit
it,
it
fol-
that one
recognize one
Truth, by recognizing successively and apart, than many distant Minds would recognize it, were it distributed among them, a different part to each. The
case
It
is
is,
Terms
every
TRUTH
is
ONE, thoV
parts at
its
TERMS
are
MANY.
true true, by of necessity at once and in an instant. What Powers therefore recognize this ONENESS or UNITY ? Where
it is
in
no respect
a time, but
even does
it
reside, or
what makes
it ?
Shall
we
an.
swer with the Stagirite, To 1 EN noiOTN TTO o NOTS ?xroy~If this be allowed, it should seem, where SEN-
SATION and INTELLECTION appear to concur, that Sen. sation was of MANY, Intellection was of ONE; that
Sensation was temporary, divisible, and successive; Intellection, instantaneous, indivisible, and at once.
If
we
we
shall find
MANY
at the Center
that
MIND
Let us then suppose SENSE and they are ONE. to view the same Radii, only let Sense view them
at
366
TV
without
HERMES.
departing from the unity and
AND
at the Circumference
we may
conceive,
Mind at the Center ; and hence how these Powers differ, eren
in perception of
There
is
ANOTHER ACT OF THE MIND, 'the very rean Act, by which it per;
MAMY
IN ONE.
This
is
that
; Chapter of this whieh enables us to investigate the Causes , and Analysis It is by Virtue of Principles, and Elements of things.
this,
that
we
tribute,
cal
and .make
are enabled to abstract any particular Atit by itself the Subject of philosophi-
Contemplation.
Were
it
not for
this, it
;
would be
because other-
wise they would be as much blended, as the several Attributes of sensible Substances. How, for example,
we necessitwo
?
qualities,
some of which
Those
367
-
AND
thus
we
we arrive at
GENERAL IDEAS
for the
Per-
Those two noble Sciences, ARITHMETIC and GEOMETRY, would have no Basis to stand on, were it not for this They are both conversant about separative Power.
.
EXTENSION
is
essential to
MONADS,
or UNITS, to Discrete.
By we
by which
we
and PERFECTLY SIMILAR UNITS, which being combined make NUMBER, and are the Subject of ARITHMETIC.
Again, by separating from Body every possible subordinate Accident, and leaving it nothing but its triple Extension of Length, Breadth,
were
it
to be deprived,
it
and unmixed MAGNITUDE, the conof whose properties makes the Science of templation
Geometry.
By
we
invesis
tigate DEFINITIONS of
To
conclude
HERMES.
Perceptions here mentioned are in fact
no
In these too we perceive the objects of SCIENCE .and REAL KNOWLEDGE, which can by no means
other.
and fixtfs).
general,
dividuals,
SISTS
THE WHOLE OF SCIENCE, COMPOSITION MAKING AFFIRMATIVE TRUTH, AND SHEWING us THINGS UNDER.
THEIR SIMILARITIES AND IDENTITIES; DIVISION MAKING NEGATIVE TRUTH, AND PRESENTING THEM TO us UNDER THEIR DISSIMILARITIES AND DIVERSITIES.
And
If all
here,
Whole, who distinguished it only separated, and WIT only brought together ? Yet so held the Philosopher of Malmsbury, and the Author
of the Essay on the
()
Human
Understanding.
The very Etymologies of the Words EniLTHMH, SCIENTIA, and UNDERSTANDING, may serve in some degree to shew the nature of these Faculties, as well as of
those Beings, their true and proper Objects. tnoutrou &* T
HIII2TH-
MH
369
Knowledge,
rys
SCIENCE 'EOISTHMH) has its name from bringing us (Em 2TA2IN) TO SOME STOP and BOUNDARY of things, taking us away from the unbounded nature and mutability of Particulars ;
for it is conversant about Subjects, that are geand invariable. neral, Niceph. Blem. Epit. Logic,
p. 21.
by the Peripatetics, came originally from Plato, as may be seen in the following account of it from his Cratylus. In this Dialogue Socrates, having
(according to the Heraclitean Philosophy, which Cratylus favoured) etymologized a multitude of Words
first
with a view to that Flow and unceasing Mutation, sup. posed by Heraclitus to run thro' all things, at length
changes his System,
another, which supposed something in nature to be permanent axidjixed. On this principle he thus proceeds
Sxo'Triy/.x.sv
$*?,
l| avruv
dv#Aaovrs- 'cr^rov
!/,
x*
ftsv
rro
TO
ovo/^
T^V
/xaAAov
s'o/xs arrif^aiTvot
^ on
<rj/A7TEf;<pE'fTa<.
the very
the
370
Ch. IV.
1
HER M E
S.
edge, as far as their nature will permit. For then only may any Particular
the
disputable
is this
(as to
its
for-
mer Etymology) hew much more naturally does it appear to signify^ that IT STOPS THE SOUL AT THINGS, than that
it is
Plat.
Cratyl.
p.
437.
Edit. Serr.
The disputable Etymology, to which he here alludes, was a strange one of his own making in the former part of the Dialogue, adapted to thejlomng System of Heraclitus there mentioned. According to this notion, he had derived EniSTHMH from 7rsar0a; and /u,5v/v? as if it
kept along with things, by perpetually following them in See Plato as before, p. 412. their motions.
As
to SCIENTIA,
we
r
RATIOCINATIO motus following ingenious etymology. est : SCIENTIA, quies : unde et nomen, turn quidam apud
Grcccos,
turn etiam nostrum.
EHISTHMH.
in
ammo.
Sic
ONTO2.
Nam
Latinum SCIENTIA, 'on ymrxi 2XE2I2 TOT ab usu Latini) quod nomen entis simplex
idem adjunxerunt.
Seal, in
Audiens^
OMVM
uv.
The
371
assert- Ch. IV.
be said
it
to
be known, when by
ing
to
The English Word, UNDERSTANDING, means not so properly Knowledge, as that Faculty of the Soul, where Knowledge resides. Why may we not then imagine,
intended to represent it as a kind of firm Basis, on which the fair Structure of
that the framers of this
Word
UNDER them,
as their
immoveable Support.
Whatever may be said of these Etymologies, whether they are true or false, they at least prove their Authors to have considered SCIENCE and UNDERSTANDING, not
asjfteeting
as steady,
powers of Perception, like Sense, but rather permanent, and durable COMPREHENSIONS.
But
if so,
we must somewhere
since
THING
(whether
it
perceive
straight as
crooked, or crooked as straight ; the moving as fixed, or the fixed as moving) SUCH PERCEPTION MUST OF NECESSITY BE ERRONEOUS
AND
FALSE.
The following
pas-
sage from a Greek Platonic (whom we shall quote again hereafter) seems on the present occasion not without its
weight
oiv
yvu-
A KNOWLEDGE more
accurate
372
Ch. IV. like,
H E R M E S.
we
refer itto
Now
of these
that
WORDS
'
different,
hence
it is,
include, so
do these
to
plain
nor even by the more refined and rational speculation of Mathematics ; for this, at its very commencement, takes such Objects
what
is
tangible,
corporeal,
and mutable
for granted.
only add, that if they reside in our own MINDS, (and who, that has never looked there, can affirm $hey do not ?) then will the advice of the Satirist
We can
be no ways improper,
373
Were
appear on every side, they would still no more want a new Language to explain themselves, than they would want
new Minds
comprehend what they beheld. All indeed, that they would want, would be the local proper Names; which Names, as we have said alreato
dy*, are hardly a part of Language, but must equally be learnt both by
learned and unlearned, as often as they change the place of their abode.
principles we may perceive the reason, why the dead Languages (as we call them) are now
IT
is
intelligible
and why the Language of modern England is able to describe antient Bb3
;
374
Ch. IV. antient
H E R M E S.
to
these matters
V
we have spoken
before.
2.
AIST D
the
(if
is
we
that
come.
If
we can
succeed here, we may discern perhaps, what kind of Beings they are, for this at
present appears somewhat obscure.
LET
( h)
As far as Human Nature, and the primary Genera both of Substance and Accident are the same in all places,
and have been so
share
thro' all ages
:
one
common IDENTITY.
Substance
As
far as peculiar
species of
and
much more,
and civil
where different
so far each
Language has
peculiar DIVERSITY.
To the
Causes of
Diversity here mentioned, may be added the distinguishing Character and Genius of every Nation^ concerning
which we
shall
speak hereafter.
375
Ch. IV.
LET
to depart.
Would he not
is
it,
retain,
when
?
had seen
And what
It
is to
to retain
such Idea?
have A
to
pondent
devoid of the Matter; the External is united with it, being seen in the metal,
the
woodland
if
the like.
Spectator to view many such Machines, and not simply to view, but to consider every part
of them, so as to comprehend
Now
we suppose
this
how
these
parts all operate to one End, he might be then- said to possess a kind of IN-
TELLIGIBLE FORM, by which he would not only vmderstand, and know the Clocks, which he had seen already, but
every
Work
'
might see
which he Should it be
asked,
b-4
376
Ch.'iv.
HERMES.
asked,
66
" which of these Forms is prior, the External and Sensible, or the InIntelligible ;" the
is
Answer
the Sensible.
we see, THERE ARE INTELLIGIBLE FORMS, WHICH TO THE SENSIBLE ARE SUBSEQUENT,
then
THUS
Machines be allowed the Work not of Chance, but of an Artist, they must be the Work 'of And one, who knew what he was about. what is it, to work, and know what one is
farther
still
BUT
If these
about?
one
is
It
is
to
doing;
to possess
A FORM INTER-
NAL, corresponding
to
to the
EXTERNAL,
an
which external
or
it
serves for
EXEM-
PLAR
ARCHETYPE.
then
we have AN INTELLIGIBLE FORM, WHICH IS PRIOR TO THE SENSIBLE FORM; which, being truly
prior as well in dignity as in time, can no
HERE
more
377
THUS
Works
of ART, we
der,
intelligible
;
and previous
to these
Works a
comitant
;
and
con-
and a
and
subsequent.
After the
first
of these
Orders the Maker may be said to work; thro* the second, the Works themselves
exist,
are;
and
in the
third they
become
recognized, as mere
To make these Forms by different Names more easy to be understood; the first may be called THE MAKER'S FORM; the second, that of THE SUBJECT; and the third, that of THE CONTEMPLATOR.
Objects
of Contemplation.
" a viewing some diversified Prospect ; " Plain, for example, spacious and fer"
tile
578
Ch. IV.
II
ER
M E S.
tile ; a river winding thro' it ; by the " banks of that-river, men walking, and " cattle grazing ; the view terminated " with distant hills, some craggy, and " some covered with wood/' Here it
is
plain
could any one quit so fair a Sight, and retain no traces of what he had beheld ? And w hat is it,
T
TURAL.
And
to retain traces
It
is
to
have certain
NAL
correspondent to
and resembling them in every thing, except the being merged in Matter. And thus, thro' the same retentive and col* lective Powers, the Mind becomes fraught with Forms natural, as before with Forms artificial. Should it be " which asked, of these natural Forms
,
Internal existing in
is
obvious,
Tucs
379
Ch.iv.
THUS
INTELLECTU quod non prius fait in SENSU; an Axiom, which we must own to be so far allowAxiom, Nil
in
able, as
it
Contemplator.
BUT
Are
CHANCE,
quiry.
or
BY DESIGN
Let us adin-
They
are certainly*
more ex-
yet these
we cannot bring ourselves to suppose made by Chance. Admit it, and what follows? We must of necessity admit a implies
MIND
also,
because
it is to
DESIGN
be found.
^LiNV, wherever
Allowing therefore
this,
what do we
mean
*
Arist. de Part. Animal. L. I, c, 1.
380
Ch. IV.
HERMES.
mean by
what
the Term,
MIND
it
We mean
acts,
something,
it is
which, when
knows
going
with Ideas of its bly to which Ideas those Works are fashioned.
do
THAT
please)
such
EXEMPLARS, PATTERNS,
(call
FORMS, IDEAS,
them
be,
must of necessity
you requires no
as
MIND,
leave without
is
them?
CHANCE
surely
as
knowing, as
rather
less
IDEAS; or IDEAS is no
blind than
THE Nature
alloAv
of these IDEAS
not
to
difficult to explain, if
we once come
That they are exquisitely beautiful, va~ rious, and orderly, is evident from the exquisite Beauty, Variety, and Order,
seen
381
v
That they
^r
*"/
consequently no Objects to any of the Senses, nor therefore circumscribed either by Time or
Place.
MIND, and
HERE
plenty
we have
FORMS INTELLIGIBLE, WHICH ARE TRULY PREVIOUS TO ALL FORMS SENSIBLE. Here too we see
of
that
NATURE
is
her
FORMS
THAT
(*)
StmpliciuS) in his
calls the first
ments,
roi
<G7
TV* /x.j0f|wf,
at other times, v
versality QY
fu0f'|f<,
calls
is,
roe.
1?
that
those
merged
Matter
calls
them
382
Ch. IV.
HERMES.
THAT
called
is
may be
x-oivoryt,
the subordinate
Universality or
lastly, of the third Order he says, that they have no independent existence of their own, but that
;
Sameness
otvrac
v,
Iv
rails
tiyitrigxts
svvoixis,
v.y$
etxvrdi
tve
own Ima-
an existence
In another Simp, in Praedic. p. 17. he says, in a language somewhat mysterious^ place yet still conformable to the same doctrine M^TTOTS v
tov
us of themselves.
Awlf'ov TO xo;vov, TO
Iv otvrol's
/xJv
tKOtfaty
KJ
Vys
savrv
tyvo-tv,
uo-
Tys oiatyogoryiTos
TO
xo/vov,
Itrn Ssi/regov $s
^
e
avros
TPTOV
e,
TO
io-raiAtvov, vo-rsgoyevss ov
Perhaps therefore
is
tee
ORDER OF WHAT
which thro'
its
UNIVERSAL
and
is
superior to Particulars,
uniform nature
multiform pre-conception it is4he cause of their Diversity that of the second Order, what is infused from the first
universal Cause into the various Species of Beings, and which has its existence in those several that of the Species third Order, what subsists abstraction in our own Unby
derstandings, being of subsequent origin to the other two. Ibid. p. 21.
To
383
Ch. IV.
VISIBLE
more
To
tions
Simplicius
we
shall
from Ammonius and Nicephorus BlemmideSj which we have ventured to transcribe, without regard to their
uncommon
Doc-
K"n^
tj
t/Vsfov
of
ns
ti<T\Quv
y^
QKx,,
Imrna-xs
on
tsczvlx,
e|
Ivos" slcriv
htfari2yu4Fi*,
l^t
y Iv
O.VTU
/o)
TO sKlvTTu^a, ry Sazvoix.
T<3C
I
*H
ro/vyv atp^xyls
e
rw
AE'y
Iv
TOI2 nOAAOIS,
vrs^oyEv^.
Taro
y I
Toi
'
sxvru TW avQ^u'ns,
T7o/e~.
'/
oe
w?
ayvosi o
384
Ch. IV*
H E R M E S.
'
more, than so many passing Pictures of these immutable Archetypes. Nay thro"
these
aAoyw
tfoi'ti
* Averts,
tsx
W y/yvo/xlvw)
TO
y/yvo/w,evov
y-Tr'
aurS.
'E*
roirjv
(AV>
^Etgov,
l<
<n
aurS
y<yvo/xvov'
E o
sf>
ws
>
^w
TW
A*?/x/8f yw
Ta
E<^>J.
"Er^ ^
TO
l,
o Iv
<$XK!V\IU rviros'
Xsysrtxt rtiro
or
T
is
*Er< 51 T nPO TON HOAAflN, ^ ^w^/roy T^J Iv rots EV TO?? >cad' EKarov avBguvrois, us avQ^w-TTtf ^ EN TOIS OOAIxlwirupMrar ^ Xlyirat r<x, roioivra
i/'A>jy.
roc,
TO ayTo aT^or T
(us
Ejrl
av
T ry
roe.
x>j/a
oivro
^ Xlysrat TTO
uVs^oYEv^-
Em TO12 HOAAOIS, r
:
ftET^
roe,
-zroAAa,
multce
insupcr
ceres sint^ et
veniat de-
ANTE MULTA
:
dicetur
in ce-
in
MULTIS
venerat intelligentia
385
Ch. IV.
Semblance of
Immortality,
Idem
in generibus et
formis
intel-
,ligendum
censeo
etenim
ille
Deus, omnium rerum formas, atque exempla habet apud se : ut si hominem efficere velit, in hominis formam, quam
habet,
intueatur,
et
ad
illius
omnes.
At
si
quis restiterit,
esse
:
Creatorem non
fex, qua? facit,
nesciet,
Opiqui
ignorat
quis
sed
id.
is>
aggreditur-)
enim
quddam
(ex quo conficitur, ut natura etiam agat, etsi quasfaciat non adverfat:} Si vero ratione quadam aliquid facit,
quodcunque ab eo factum est omnino cognovit. Si igitur Deus non pejore ratione, quam homo, facit quid, qua:
fecit cognovit
:
si
mas
esse
perspicuum
Formce autem in
opifice
sunt
ANTE MULTA, perinde ac in annulo sigittum, hcecque forma hominis species in et avulsa a mattrid dicifur. Atqui
unoquoque homine est, quemadmodum etiam sigilla ceris ; et IN MULTIS, nee avulsa a materid dicitur*
in
At
in
cum
conspicimus^
et
ilia
eandem
unoquoque
?ncnte
formam
effigies in
MULTA,
et posterius genita
dieetur
in cerd
multa
sigilla
uno
/4mmon.
Cc
386
Ch. IV.
HERMES.
Immortality, and continues throughout
ages
Asyoflou Sc
rot,
ysvn
roe,
ci'o^
imsirtu
'
re
\
V T
T
/XTJO"
wv
oAwjr
Ta
Iv
j/,aT', x^
foe,
ooxSvra 'croAAa
TjJ
v
Aoyy
(rvvatQgoio'Ks cis
EV,
^X^'
TWTO
X.XTOC.
^ixvotocv.
To
/^tV
ff^patyi^'ftpiov
TimufAX AfyTa<
TO
5'
Iv
TOW x^/o/j,
x^
EN TOI2 ROAJ/avo/av
\% awruv
x.<x.roc,hY)$Qiv ,
'
Ka.ru.
v
oivXus
x^
roc,
yTTofav, EFII
si'i7
TOIS TlOAAOIiS.
/AE'V
eJff-
Oyro-'r
EX
xl TJ:
yvj
TW A*)/x/^yw, xaTa
TBS-
njxato-/,
xatQ' av
Aoys-
t'Trs^sa;'
Xsyovixt
Ta
roc.
ovJa -crav/a
x^ ns^'^^fff. x^ -cra^^yfltyEV
t'^'P'JXE'v;*'
ys'j x^
T<i.
\^fl^
?!(&'
evqiffx.troe.1
^'
'
\~
c
fTfifots,
"
jgv
"qjw
Iv dlvQguTrots
O^E,
)c
TOW i'AAow
(^ojois
TO yi'v^
^cio/i:
run rotzruv
t^aJv,
OTTE^ Ifi
e/y,3
x^
TOW
/o-9>jT^xov,
x^
387
Ch.lV.
c 2
those
"^^
"X^r
Te
e<
E o-vv
rois
1^4/v^y
IQetet
ns
Iwiffwrrw
E
xj
TO.
oi-
arupoe,
av^Tixv
xcriuv,
xTO^Tr
TO CTfwrov
<rvvl$gix,(A.*i<Tav
rots li^if^ivois
>^
ruv
ytv-
9rT*<
yevixwralov
-ev
EN TOI2 OOAAOIS
v^er^xe
ra s/^
>^
ra yew.
K-
wv OE T/jl>t
TO
TO
uarixv If
a-TravT^v <7yXXoy*sra//,EV', o
-^
rot.
ro<aToy Iv
TJ
S Xtowotp
rx yiw
;
s'i$n
xvXus
vvsryw Eni TO 1 2
Genera verb
TTOAAOI2, TTf<
et Species
dicuntur esse
MULT A.
habens,
et in
lo.'
Ut
medium
Cum
qu& videbantur
unum
coegissety hoc in
mente teneat.
Nempe
ANTE
Us de-
JIULTA
ilia I'ero in
cem, IN MULTIS
qucs vero ab
MULTA,
ANTE MULTA
in Creators
secundum rationes
efficients.
388
HERMES.
changes, that
befal
it
every
moment.
MAY
effect-rices
rationes
una
ille
dum
nera
quas rationes
supra-substantialis
omnes res
et
prcedestinavit et produxit.
et Species
Ge-
IN MULTIS, quoniam
singulis hominibus
hominis Species, et in singulis equis equi Species est. In hominibus ceque ac in equis et aliis animalibus Genus invenitur
harum specierum, quod est animal. In animalibus etiam una cum Zoophytis magis wiivcrsale Genus, nempe sensiti-
yum
exquiritur.
matum.
Corpus perspiciet.
its
Cum autem
appa-
modo
tractatis,
primum et generalissimum Genus. Atque it a quidem IN MULTIS subsistunt Genera et Species.. Comprehendens
iero quisquam ex singulis hominibus naturam ipsam hu-
ita uniet
tmiversale
maxima universale
slid
mente
Genera
Species
cst,
immaterial iter
constituit
POST MULTA,
et posterius
Vid.
f
etiam
IX X.
The following elegant lines of Virgil are worth attending to ? tho' applied to no higher a subject than Bees.
Ergo
389
Ch. IV.
MAY
those
we be allowed then to credit " it tell us, speculative Men, who " is C c3
Ergo
Exdpiat
G. IV.
is,
may
be seen in
;
all
animal or inanimate
several Kinds
still
remain.
And
meaning o^ that passage in the Timceus, where the philosopher describe TIME to be ^EVOVT- a/vIv svl KO.T
dEternitotis in uno
certis
numerorum
articu-
progredientem.
Plat.V. III.
p. 37. Edit.
S'err an.
subjoined the following extract from Boethius, to serve as a commentary on this description of
We have
TIME.
^TERNITAS
igitur
est,
simul et perfect a possession Quod ex cottatione temporalium clarius liquet. Nam qui4quid vivit in TEMPORE, id prcesens a procttritis in futura procedit : nihilque est in tem~
pore
ita constitutum,
;
quod totum
vita',
suce
spatium pariter
possit amplecti
hesternum vero
jam pcrdidit.
890
Oh. IV,
j5
HERMES.
in
th ese
" "
"
sive
FORMS
THE DEITY
views at
"future that this great and stupendous " View is but a View of himself, where all " lie in their
things
inveloped
Principles
to the
"fulness
Quod
unquam
esse>
nee
cum temporis
licet
infinitate tendatur,
non-
dum tamen
tale est,
Non
Quod
pariter comprehendit^ acpossidet, cui nequefuturi quidquam absit) nee prceteritijluxerit, id STERNUM essejvre perhibetur
:
idque ncccssc
est,
et
sui
compos prcesens
sibi
semper
assistere, et
infinitatem
Unde quidam non recte, qui cum audiunt visum Platoni? muiulum /nine ncc habuisse initium, nee habiturum esse de~
icctunij
num
putaitt.
Aliud
est
INTERMINABI-
ESSE PBJESENTIAM,
est.
manifestum
Nequc
391
\J^J
the
Axiom before mentioned. We must now say Nil est in SENSU, quod non prius fuit in INTELLECT u.
For
tho' the contrary
may be
true with
respect to Knowledge merely human, yet never can it be true with respect to * Cc4 Know-
HUNG
que eum effingere, atque eequare non possit, ex immobilitate deficit in motum ; ex simplicitate prcesentice decrescit in in-
ef,
aliquo
modo nunquam
volucrisque
moment i
quce^ quoniam MANENTIS imus PR^ESEJNTTI^E QUANDAM GESTAT iMAGiMEM, quibuscuinquc contigerif, id
j)rcestat,
ut
ESSE videantvr.
potuitj infaiitum
turn est, ut
Temporis
iter arripuit ;
nem
PERMANENUO.
V.
Iteque, &G.
De
Con^Ut
JPhilasoph, L.
392
H E R M E S.
Knowledge
Precedence
universally, unless
to
BOT>Y,
we give LIFELESS
other
Con-
But yet
in
it
is
Metaphysomewhat reSystems,
markable,
their
several
how
Precedence.
FOR mark
First
ble
comes that huge Body the sensiWorld. Then this and its Attributes
sensible Ideas.
beget
Then out of
sen-
sible Ideas,
pruning, are made Ideas intelligible, whether specific or general. Thus should they admit that MIND was coeval
till
BODY
gave
it
Ideas,
and
393
Ch. IV.
of dead Capacity
it
for IN-
NATE IDEAS
any.
AT
another time
we hear of Bodies
very Exiof sensation lity makes them susceptible and knowledge ; as if they shrunk into
so exceedingly fine, that their
Intellect
by
their
exquisite
subtlety,
which rendered them too delicate to be Bodies any longer. It is to this notion
we owe many
subtle
curious inventions,
Spirits,
such as
Mther, animal
and the
like
Terms, which
MODERN PHILOSOPHY,
occult Qualities, has
itself,
to
BUT
never forgets Deity, postpones every thipg corporeal to the primary mental
Cause
394
Ch. IV.
HERMES.
Cause.
It
is
here
it
of
intelligible
Ideas,
even of
those,
which
tined
exist in
human Capacities.
For
may be
the des-
medium,
to
contained in Sense, than the Explosion of a Cannon, in the Spark which gave
it fire (0.
IN
W The following
fore, p. 371.) J 7 f
Note
is
Commentary of the Platonic Olympiodorus, (quoted beupon the Phoedo of Plato which, tho' perA some may object to from inclining to the Doctrine haps
' ;
'
it
account
how
far
Science, than
we can
by vulgar Philosophers.
It
Se^x^
iziiQtcrOait,
w, or*
ov/ewff
IK TWV
by no means the
Principles
395
Ch.iv.
In short ALL
too
more excellent ; and though we admit the Common interpretations, and allozv SENSE to be a Principle of SCIENCE, we musty however, call it a PrinPrinciples or Causes of the
ciple,
not as if
it
was the
efficient Cause.,
but as
it
rouses
our Soul
the
to the Recollecton
of genaral Ideas
According to
same way of thinking is it said in the Timczus, that through the Sight and Hearing we acquire to ourselves Philosophy, because we pass froth Objeclls of SENSE to REMINISCENCE or RECOLLECTION.
And
in
-'
^'^^?
'ZD'aylwv
ruv
ovtav
For in as much as
taining the Principles of all beings,
is
a sort of
it
OMNIFORM
roused by which U
REPRESENTATION or EXEMPLAR
objects of Sense,
it
zshcn
is
recollects
those Principles,
contains within,
Georgius Gemistus,
upon
otherwise called Pletho, writes the same subject in the following manner. T^y 4/nQtpsvot ocvx^x^xyacratysa-ys
fov
lixrirnjji.w rx-s
avrzs
ia,'jTy
ta-^tiv, y
To
av
r&eursgov ra
-^v^,-^ oye
//.
x av
rut
<xt<rQv)ruv
i<T%iv
rw
IJ
Ou $' xv f^#/*S
AAo0< oy ^vr'nv
avrw
&acvn~ff~
Qou'
396
Ch. IV.
HERMES.
too are their Ideas, or intelligible Forms. Were it otherwise, there could be no
intercourse between
Man
and Man, or
(what
rots
ot,
\/t>c
ruv
tvxi
ouv
xn
/,*>
ovrow
ovruv
KOC.T
c\\uv
<Tvvo-is rtvas, a
yice.ro,
ro ogov yivo[Avo
xgttrlovos rt
a<^'
TZ'oAAa) IV<
ov
iipyxeiv
ry
-v-n
TO
TssT
TTO
ruv
rois oiar-
Xoy^v.
the Soul,
of Science,
them
herself as
else.
from
herself\
without
where
For
which
is
in sensible ob-
tVHICH
FECT.
pd.it.
IS
Pwis 1541.
or
The rOAOi
397
Man
FOR
Ch. IV.
*~r**s
mean not only those relative Proportions of Equality and Inequality, which exist in Quantity,
here speaks,
(such as double, sesquialter, &c.) but in a larger sense, they may be extended to mathematical Lines, Angles,
Figures, &c. of
possess in the
all
we
Mind
yet
it
may be
justly questioned,
them ever
To
these
enumerated many acts of the MIND or INTELLECT, wholly distinct from Sensation, and indepenafter having
*lent of
it,
at length concludes,
Hose
est efficiens
magis,
Longc caussa
potentior,
Quam
quce material
modo
Ac
Cum
lux oculosferit,
inst refit ;
Ad
Notis applicat
INTROJISUMQUE RECONDITIS
FORMIS
miscet imagines.
De
Consolat. fhilosoph. L. T,
398
Ch. IV.
HERMES.
For what
is
?
Conversation between
It
is
Man
and
Man
a mutual
inter-
course of Speaking and Hearing. To the Speaker, it is to teach; to the Hearer, it is to learn.
to
To
the Speaker,
;
it is
to the
Hearer,
to
is
is
he said
to
What then
said
to
requisite, that he
may be
up
unto
derstand ?
within him-
similar to those
The same may be within the Speaker. said of a Writer ami a Reader ; as when
any one reads to-day or to-morrow, or here or in Italy, what Euclid wrote in Greece two thousand years ago.
Objects^
399
-
AGAIN, do we
GOD
MEN
possible for to signify his will to Men; or for to signify their wants to GOD ?
it
allow
then do these
COMMON IDENTIC IDEAS come ?Those of Men, it seems, come all from Sensation. And whence come
God's Ideas ?-^-Not surely from Sensation too ; for this we can hardly venture to
affirm, without giving to
table
Body that
to the
no-
In-
tellection
of even
God himself.
Let them
then be original; let them be connate, and essential to the divine Mind. If
this
be true,
is it
that Ideas of corporeal rise, and others pf mental, (things derived from tubjects
so
400
HERMES.
V. so totally distinct) should so happily coincide in the same wonderful Identity ?
abstruse
MINDS
all
have them original; or some have them original, and some derived. If all
derived, they
must
be derived from something, which is itself not Mind, aftd thus we fall insenIf all sibly into a kind of Atheism. have them original, then are all Minds
divine,
an Hypothesis by
far
more
if this
But
be not admitted, then must one Mind (at least) have original Ideas, and the
supposing this last, whence are those Minds, 'whose Ideas are derived, most likely to
derive
rest
have them
derived.
Now
them?
From MIND,
or from
From MIND, a thing homogenqous ; or from BODY, a thing heterogeneoub? From MIND, such as (from
Bo:pY?
the Hypothesis) has original Ideas ; or
from
401
thus
we
shall
be enabled with
more assurance
cur can Poet,
to decide, whether
the,
we
Epi*
sings in divine
Igneus
ORIGO
Seminibus. -*-*,
BUT
NOYN SE s^sv SftMA ycvva' &us-yag <zv r* ANOHTA NOYN ysvwo-oi No BODY produces MIND :for how should THINGS DEVOID OF MIND produce MIND ? Sattust de
(0
;
Dtis et
Mundo,
c. 8.
Dd
402
Ch. IV.
HERMES,
But
it
is
now
time,
to
quit these
Those, who would trace them farther, and have leisure for such studies, may perhaps find themselves
Speculations.
much
We
Subject, and shall therefore pass from hence to our concluding chapter.
CHAR
403
CHAP.
V.
Subordination of Intelligence
Difference both in particular Men, and of Ideas, in whole Nations Different Genius of Character of the different Languages
Greek Languages
of the Last
cellence
Superlative Conclusion.
Ex-
TRUTH
Ch. V.
Those Philosophers, whose Ideas of Being and Knowledge are derived from Body and Sensation^ have a
(<*)
TRUTH.
It
is
for himself ;
which
comes and goes, just as it is remembered and forgot ; which in the order of things makes its appearance the
last
Ob-
According
Truths, which have that will be, and have others, not
many
404
Ch, V,
HERMES.
preme
Intelligence, may be said (as it were) to shine with unchangeable splen-
susceptible of its benign influence. Passions and other obstacles may pre-
vent indeed
its
efficacy, as clouds
;
and
vapours
self
may
neither
admits
But
had very
those
TRUTH
it
not as the
who,
call
indicate something
To these
it
must
appear somewhat strange, how men should Imagine, that a crude account of the method how they perceive Truth,
was to
if
to de-
of that Metropolis.
For my own
part,
when
am
how my
Ideas are
all
man
BOOK THE
fcnly
Tinitih
405
Ch.
particular Percipients. Among these therefore we must look for ignorance and errour, and for that Subordi*.
nation of Intelligence, which tural consequence*
is
V*
their na-
WE
we
to profess ourselves
Much more is this true, with respect to NATURE; and well for man-
D
man
d3
kind
Soul in the light of a Crucible!, where Truths are produced by a kind of logical Chemistry. They may
we know)
are as
much
If
Milton
by
his
URANIA
intended to represent
TRUTH, he certainly referred her to a much more antient, as well as a far more noble origin.
Heavenly born !
Before the
Thou
Wisdom thy Sister and with her didst play In presence ofth* almighty Father, pleased
With thy celestial Song. See Proverbs VIII. 22, &c. Antonin. IX. 1.
P. L. VII.
406
Ch. v.
H E R M E S.
kind
at
is it
found to be
if
-For
self ;
what
shall
Proportions,
too general,
is
some
too
and (what
worse than
all this)
with
many
These it behoves us to trary to Truth. correct as far as possible, by cool suspense and candid examination.
vv
AND
little
and
VIRTUE appear
to co-in-
Ch.v.
cidej
being the business of both to examine our Ideas, and to amend them by the Standard of Nature and of Truth ( b).
it
important Work, we shall be led to observe, how Nations, like single Men, have their peculiar Ideas how
IN
this
Archetype
^
I)
how
the wisest
Na*
tions
d4
useful to
KNOWLEDGE
in general, a
GRAMMATICAL DISQUISITION
into the Etymology and Meaning of WORDS was esteemed by the chief and ablest Philosophers, may be Seen by
Xenoph.
Mem. IV.
5,
Arrian. Eptct.
8.
I.
Marc. Anton.
III. 11.
V.
X.
8.
(c)
H00YS XAPAKTHP
g r/
M^u**
AOJTO2.
Stob.
Capiuntur Signa hand levia, sed observatu digna (quod for fosse quispiam non putarit) deingeniis etmoribus popu~>
nationum ex linguzs ipsorum. Bacon, de Augm. Sclent. VI. 1. Vid. etiam. Quintil. L. XI. p. 675. Edit.
lorum
et
Capper on.
Diog. L.
I.
p, 58.
et
Dtsp.V.
W.
408
Ch-
HERMES,
v
having the most and best Ideas, will consequently have the best and
tions,
most
copious
pounded, and who have borrowed from different countries different Arts and
Practices, discover
by WORDS, to whom
To
illustrate
said,
by
WE
in our
Language may sufficiOur terms in polite Liteently shew. rature prove, that this came from Greece ; our Terms in Music and Painting, that these came from Italy our Phrases in
;
we
learnt these
from the French', and our Phrases in Navigation, that we were taught by the Flemings and Low Dutch. These many and very different Sources of our Lani
Yet we have
this
advantage to compensate
409
in Ch. v.
Elegance,
we gain
in
will
LET us pass from ourselves -to the NATIONS OF THE EAST. The W> Eastern World, from the earliest days, has been at all times the Seat of enormous
Monarchy.
never shed
On
its
any time
civil
Discords arose
among
them (and
innumerable)
the contest was never about the Form of their Government; for this was an object, of
which the Combatants had no conception;) it was all from the poor motive of, who should be their MASTER, whether
(d) A*a
'EXX^y^v,
yoc,^
TO <JyA/KwTpo<
(A
oi <$s
r-nv
Evguwv,
Tjy ^o-7roTc)v
f%^v ;
^EV
^vo-^s^xivovrss.
tlieir
For
the
Barbathe
Manners than
410
Ch. V.
HERMES.
whether a Cyrus or an Artaxerxes, a
Mahomet
or a Mustapha*
their Condition,
?
SUCH was
and what
came consonant to their servile State, and their Words became consonant to their servile Ideas. The great Distinction; for ever in their sight,
;
was that of Tyrant and Slave the most unnatural one conceivable, and the most susceptible of pomp, and empty exaggeration*
Hence they
Thus
tho'
(e)
The
may be found
in
is
the intrinsic Greatness of the Subjects there treated; the Creation of the Universe; the Dispensations of divine Providence, &c*
411
-
their neighbours, who were often at times not only their neighbours, but their
by
masters
the Asiatic
unknown
to the chaste
eloquence and purity of Athens. But of the Greeks we forbear to speak now, as we shall speak of them more fully,
when we have
first
considered the
Na-
ROMANS?
Nation en*
gaged
and commotions, some foreign, some domestic, which for seven hundred years wholly engrossed their
in wars
thoughts.
Hence
therefore their
LAN-
GUAGE became,
ous in
all
l(ke
Terms expressive of tilings political, and well adapted to the purposes both of History and popular EloBut what was their Philosophy? quence. As a Nation, it was none, if we may
credit their ablest Writers.
/
And hence
to this
Language
Subject;
413
Ch. v.
HERM&.
Subject; a defect, which even Cicero
is
compelled to confess, and more fully makes appear, when he writes Philoso-
phy
number of terms,
(/)
which he
obliged to invent
Firgil
See
Cic. de Fin.
I.
C. 1, 2, 3.
I.
III.
C.
I,
2, 4. &<%
3.
where he
says,
PHI-
Jiabuit lu*
est ; ut si,
&c*
it
and
CICERO applied appears, himself to the writing of Philosophy, the Romans had nothing of the kind in their language, except some mean
2.
where
same
sect.
How far
the
Well as eloquence,
seen not only from the titles of those now lost, but much more from the
still
may be
are
r ^ s ^ na ^
many
noble ones
fortunately preserved.
flourished near*
by
his silence to
have overderiving
all
;
his
own
sect
and, like
in
Philosophy in Latin , both from the Poverty of the Tongue, and from the Novelty of the Subject.
Nee
413
Tu
GRAIORUM
Nee me
J)ifficile
animifallit,
inlustrare
obscura reperta
esse,
sit
LATINIS versibus
quom
agendum,)
:
Propter EGESTATEM LINGUA et RERUM NOVITATEM Sed tua me virtus tamen, et sperata voluptas
Suavis amicijice quemvis perferre laborem Lucr. Suadet
I.
137,
In the same age, Varro, among his numerous works, wrote some in the way of Philosophy ; as did the Patriot
Virtue,
much applauded
by
Cicero
but these
Works
are
now
lost.
Soon
RACE, some of whose satires and epistles may be justly ranked amongst the most valuable pieces of Latin Philosophy, whether
we
by
H E R M E S.
REGERE IMPERIO POPULOS,
mane* memento,
(H&
tibi
nere morem,
Parcere
FROM
so his works, tho' small, shew an early proficiency in Of him it may be said, that he the Science of Morals.
is
difficult
writer
among
sics,
sufficient
merit to
make
it
worth
IQ the same degenerate and tyrannic period, also SENECA; whose character, tioth as a Man and a
Writer,
is
by the noble
refer.
whom we
Under a milder Dominion, that of Hadrian and the Antoninesy lived AULUS GELLIUS, or (as some call him)
AGELLIUS, an entertaining writer in the miscellaneous way ; well skilled in Criticism and Antiquity ; who
he can hardly be entitled to the name of a Philosopher, yet deserves not to pass unmentioiied here, from
tho*
his,
works.
range MACROBIUS, not because a Contemporary, (for he is supposed to have lived under
Gettius
With Autus
we
//cm/raws
415
Ch. V.
FROM
pass to
Honorius and Theodosms) but from his near resemblance, in the character of a Writer. His works, like the other's,
filled with Mythology and antient ; some Philosophy being intermixed. His Literature, Commentary upon the Somnium Sdpionis of Cicero may
are miscellaneous
be considered
as
Gellius,
ZEIUS of Madaura in Africa, a Platonic Writer, whose Matter in general far exceeds his perplexed and affected
Stile,
Age
when he
but of a
later
if
tho'
After Capella, we may rank CHALCIDIUS the Platonic, both his Age, and Country, and Religion are
doubtful.
is
rather
more agree-
work
Commentary upon
the Timteus
416
-
HERMES.
They
The last Latin Philosopher was BOETHIUS, who was descended from some of the noblest of the Roman Families,
Ch V. tained their Liberty, were the most heroic Confederacy, that ever existed.
Cen-
tury.
He wrote many
in
philosophical
Works,
is
the greatest
part
But
On
the
partly prose and deserves great encomiums both /or the partly verse, Matter, and for the Stile ; in which last he approaches
the Purity of a far better age than his own, and is in all respects preferable to those crabbed Africans already mentioned. By command of Theodoric king of the
Goths,
it
fate of this
worthy
Man
to suffer
death
with
whom
mains of
Roman
the Latin Tongue, and the last reDignity, may be said, to have sunk ii^
the western
left
Philosophical
Writings ; such as MUSONIUS RUFUS, and the two Emperors, MARCUS ANTONINUS and JULIAN ; but as these
preferred the use of the Greek
Tongue
to their
And
so
LATIN
we
consider them as
all
The
417
the politest, the bravest, and Ch.V. the wisest of men. In the short space
of
Physicians,
Sculptors,
Poets, Critics,
of
all)
hardly
Jielp
PERIOD,
ascend.
Now
(s)
we
If we except Homer, Hesiod, and the Lyric Poets, hear of few Grecian Writers before the expedition of
Xerxes.
After that
defeated,
and
may
till
whom
it
This is that Golden Period spoken of do not mean that Greece had not many writers of great merit subsequent to that period, and especially of the philosophic khid ; but the Great, the Striking,
above.
the Sublime (call
it
as
you
it
to a heightj to which
Ee
Th*
418
H E R M E S.
Now, THE LANGUAGE OF THESE
GREEKS was
was
and
When
fortune befel the people of Rome. the Punic wars were ended, and Carthage their
rival
dreaded
(as
arts.
their
Orators,
Rome,
like Greece,
I call these
two
two
greatest
Ge-
niuses that flourished in each, oneTHESociiATic PERIOD, the other THE CICERONIAN.
There are
them.
stUl
Neither Period commenced, as long as solicitude for the common welfare engaged men's attentions, and
such wars impended, as threatened their destruction by But when once these fears Foreigners and Barbarians.
they began to cultivate those of Elegance and Pleasure. Now, as these naturally produced a kind of wanton in.
solence (not unlike the vitious temper of high-fed ani-
mals) so by
solved.
this
Pelo-
ponnesian
419
ch V.
-
Where Matter
with other wars, its imponnestan War, which together broke the confederacy of their mediate consequence, Commonwealths ; wasted their strength ; made them
jealous of each
other
of
and thus paved a way for the Macedon to enslave them all,
A like luxuriance
the
Romans;
raised
by
Phtltppi, and the subsequent defeat of Anthony at Actiiim.) the Romans became subject ta the dominion
Camus at
of a FELLOW-CITIZEN.
must indeed be confessed, that after Alexander and Qctavius had established their Monarchies, there were many bright Geniuses^ wha were eminent under their
It
Government.
Aristotle
maintained
a friendship and
In the time epistolary correspondence with Alexander. of the same Monarch lived Theophrwtus, and the Cynic
Diogenes.
their
Then
also Demosthenes
So likewise
420
H E R M E 3.
and those exquisite in every kind, as the Ideas for which they stood. Apd hence it followed, there was not a sub^
ject to be found, which could not with
were Words and Numbers for the Humour of an Aristophanes ; for the native Elegance of a Philemon or Me-.
nander ; for the amorous Strains of a
HERE
Mimnermus
iusj
fine
But
then' it
must be reeducated in
admiration of after-ages.
The
Successors and
Forms of
So true
is
GoTcrnment
left
by Alexander and
the growth of any thing farther in the kind. rs that noble saying of Ijongimts fi-$,ott
i
yf
i
Ixonv rai
LIBERTY
that
is
formed to
rwk.
De SubL
Sect. 44.
421
the rural
and
for the
sublime Conceptions of a Sophocles or Homer. The same in Prose. Here Isolates was enabled to display his Art,
in all the accuracy of Periods, nice counterpoise of Diction,
torrent, too
impetuous to be
withstood*
WHO
#0,
Different,
;
for as to their Philosophy itself, it was in Aristotk, strict, mereality the same.
422
Ch. V.
H E R M E S.
<we
seem
is
to read a page.
this
all
How
in
exqui-
sitely
performed
Greek ? be done
satisfy
by attempting
to
translate him, or
by perusing his translations already made by men of learnOn the contrary, when we read ing.
either
Xenophon or Plato, nothing of this The ?nethod and strict order appears. Formal and didactic is wholly dropt.
it is
without
Address, in .'which, as in a Mirrour, we behold human Life, adorned in all its colours of
AND
and
satiric;
enriching
his
Works
423
marvellous, and the mystic; ascending but rarely into the Sublime; nor then so
much
itself.
stile,
as
THE Language in the mean time, which He and Plato wrote, appears
in
to
suit so accurately with the Stile of both, that when we read either of the two,
thinking, that
it
is
he
and
AND
from
for
its
thus
is
and
e 4
all that is
424
tiful,
HERMES.
in every Subject,
Form of writing.
GRAIIS
Musa
ingenium, rotunda
loqui.
GRAIIS ded&
ore
It were
to
amongst
who
sure (for as to such, as do either from Views more sordid, we leave them, like
to their destined drudgery) it were to be wished, I say, that the libe-
Slaves,
ral
(if
letters)
Models of Grecian Literature; that they would not waste those hours which they cannot recall, upon the meaner productions of the French and English Press
;
425
and more
rarely
still,
any solid
c^
improvement.
t
To be
learning,
by no means a work of such insuperable pains. The very progress itself is attended with delight, and resembles a Journey through some pleasant Country, where every mile we advance, new charms arise. It is certainly as easy to be a Scholar, as a Gamester, or many other Characters equally
application, the same quantity of habit will fit us for one, as completely as for the
other.
illiberal
and low.
The same
And
as to those
who
tell
us,
it
Men, and not Books, we must study to become knowing this I have always
;
guage Of Dunces. They shelter their ignorance under a few bright Examples
426
ch
-
II
ER
M E S.
whose transcendent abilities, without the common helps, have been sufficient of themselves to great and imporBut alas tant Ends.
pies,
!
Decipit exemplar
vitiis imitabile
IN truth, each man's Understanding^ when ripened and mature, is a compoof natural Capacity and of superHence the greatest induced Habit.
site
r
be necessarily those, who possess the best Capacities, cultivated with the best Habits. Hence also moderate Capacities, when adorned with valuable
will
Men
Science, will far transcend others the most acute by nature, when either neglected, or applied to low and base purposes.
And thus for the honour of CULTURE and GOOD LEARNING, they
Man,
Ms
natural Superiors.
AND
427
Ch.v.
AND
so
much
at present as to GE-
acquire them;
whence they are derived; what is their Nature; and what their connection zcith
Language.
UNIVERSAL
GRAMMAR.
AD-
ADVERTISEMENT,
JL
HE following Notes
lations
them.
the
Author has said already concerning others of the same kind) are valuable loth for
their
Rarity y
and for
their
intrinsic
Merit,
431
ADDITIONAL NOTES:
X AG.
Proclus
95.
in
IS
TO STOP,
the
<$c.]
THING
Parts.
Note may be thus rendered THAT AT REST, which FOR A TIME PRIOR AND SUBIN THE
SEQUENT
is
SAME PLACE,
its
ysvoptvov)
and
render the passage thus For by this faculty fnamely the faculty of Sense) zee neither know the Future, nor the
Pasty but the Present only.
P. 106. NOTE (d).^ The passage of Philoponus, here referred to, but by mistake omitted, has respect to the notion of beings corporeal and sensible, which were
said to be nearly approaching to
Non-Entity s.
The Au-
thor explains
ing
TO
-Tlus
(>
this,
fji.v)
among
Sari
other reasons,
;
by the followTO
roTs
yurvid^st
Tlgurov
/AEV, lirsiS
-CTitf
p*
ovrat'
/xsv
vx
tn
Iff,
TO ^e
<7rw e<?i'
<r
vruv
How
Non-Entitys ?
they
therefore
is it
THE PAST and THE FUTURE, and these are NON-.ENTITYS ; for the one is vanished, and is no
exist) exists
is
not as yet.
Now all
natural Substances
it is
zsith
TIME, or rather
upon -their
Jkfo-
TIME
is
an Attendant.
P. 119.
433
P. 119
ADDITIONAL
in.
NOTES,
is
the
made
or INSTANT, and its efficacy. To that there is not only a necessary Connection between Existence and Me Present Instant , be-
cause no other Point of Time can properly be said to be, but also between Existence and Life, because whatever
lives,
by the same reason necessarily Is. Hence sneaking of Time present., elegantly says of it
Sophocles^
P. 227.
The Passage
in Virgil, of
speaks,
is
the heads of
curru abscissa
Suspendit capita.
is
persons, which were cut off, whereas the sense requires, of THE Two persons, that is to say,
Two
of Amycus and Diores. Now this by Amborum would have been exprest properly, as Amborum means THE
Two
only
by Duorum
is
exprest improperly, as
it
means
Two
indefinitely.
P. 259.
lay
The Passage
be thus rendered-
and little,
so that in
may
P. 294.
ADDITIONAL
P. 294.
NOTES.
number of things
433
Note
(c)
/, which have a most known EXISTENCE, but a mast unknown ESSENCE; such for example as Motion, Place, and more than either of them, Time. The EXISTENCE of
each of these
is
known and
is
indisputable, but
what their
ESSENCE
is,
or Nature,
among
to discern.
The Soul
is
also is in the
;
same Class
it is, is
that
it is
something^
most evident
but zthat
a matter not
so easy to learn.
P. 340
LANGUAGE
DEMONSTRATION.]
220, and the additional note to the words. The Source of infinite Truths, &c.
P. 368
in the
Note
the
Jlalmesbury, and
from the Philosophy of Plato and Pythagoras, seems to have far excelled these Moderns in his, account of WISDOM or PHILOSOPHY, and its Attributes,
Philoponus,
OT essential Characters.
-'l^ov
yg
(piXoo-opiizs
>
TO
Iv
rois
v Hti%a.i
ryv X.OIVUVIMV,
TO Jv rots
iiai
(lege <prlys) Y^
rtvi
WE
bVa)
T/ KOIVOV s^yiy-
IT
IS
OF PHILOSOPHY TO SHEW IN MANY THINGS, WHJCH HAVE DIFFERENCE, WHAT is THEIR COMMON CHARACTER ; and
IN
THRO*
MANY THINGS, WHICH HAVE A COMMON CHARACTER, WHAT IT is THEY DiFFEk. It is indeed no difficult
matter
434
ADDITIONAL
NOTES.
;
matter to shew the common Character of a Wood-Pigeon and a Dove, (for this is evident to every one), but rather
to tell
where
lies
the Difference
nor
Dog and a Horse, but rather Philop. Com. MS. they possess in common.
'between a
to shew,
what
in
Nicomach.
'Arithm.
P. 379
4* C *1
Words
<)'
/w,AXov
ri
\>n
TO
TO
HAOV
Iv
Iv
ro~f
rvis TE%V>)*.
more
in the
ART.
MIND, &c.] taken froni the third Book of following quotation, a manuscript Comment of Proclus on the Parmenides of Plato, is here given for the sake of those, who have cu-
The
by
antient Philosophers.
JLl
GE?
XEvo<j ygscrs,
YI
rov
ort
rovnx. -sravTa
t^lv,
ocrae,
O^<ZT,
aAA'
OCIIQ
jo u'To crXv)y*3V,
siwo T#J]o/x,aT
KOC.T'
OLiriotV
^o?
TW
o (vxriv
xaQ'
a.v.rci,
Tarwv yo;^
x.oc.<rts
TO
VIMS'
/
Wf T
E
aTTO
TX.vloiAtX.
>^
ayo Ti3o//T8 Ta
0E/oTTa
ff
ADDITIONAL
NOTES.
why THE
all
435
a CAUSE.
are cither
more
among those ENDINGS of tilings will be last, more excellent than their BEGINNINGS. To which too may
come
and
so the
M//.?;
that ESSENTIAL
CAUSES
OUGHT TO BE PRIOR TO ACCIDENTAL, in OS much ttS EVERY ACCIDENTAL CAUSE IS A DEVIATION FROM THEM SO
;
that whatever
is
the
effect^
of such essential
Came
[as
is
indeed every work of Art and human Ingenuity] must needs be prior to that which is the Effect of Chance, even
though we were to
objects [the
refer to
heavens themselves].
thus proved a definite Cause
to Chance, proceeds to
of the
shew
this fol-
and concurrent Order of things Cause must be ONE. After which he goes oh as
lows.
Ei /xsv av
<?xi ytx,g
-craA/v
rtvv
uv rys
x^ yiiuanv
OCITIOLS
TU
T9/5TO.
TIotvTos ov }
TU
p^ov,
'
OAa
[AEgos,
o \O~TIV air'
Ef
OE Aoyov
ov,
SXV
(pvcriv.
T&dvTuv eitnov
Jf Qt^iv } ori
'E;
li-
KXT v&ixv
TO ^
u^tar^vus
f 2
W*
436
ADDITIONAL
NOTES.
?
If wv TO
jSAcTrov, x}
ny, w
Iav7e
elirtov.
Ka/
I/
TTO,
yrot
lis
lavro
ag*
Aoyo;?
?cj
tiXso-tv
f <v
Iv
auTw TO
Ilav,
a)S
IF THIS
CAUSE BE VOID O^
again
REASON,
among
came
more
I mean by more
to
excellent,
Reason and Knowledge, and yet within and a Part of that Whole, which is, what
Cause devoid of Reason*
is,
from a
on the contrary, THE CAUSE OF THE UNIVERSE BE A CAUSE, HAVING REASON and knowing itself, it of
But
if,
ing ignorant of
ture.
this, it
But
if it
knows
definitely,
knows
also
of necessity
knows for
this
which
it
is
the Cause.
all things
IT
VERSE, and
combe
the Cause.
Bat
if this
LOOKING INTO
ITSELF,
AND BY
KNOWING ITSELF, IT KNOWS WHAT COMES AFTER ITSELF, AND is SUBSEQUENT. It is, therefore, through certain REASONS and FORMS DEVOID or MATTER that it knows
those
ADDITIONAL
those
NOTES.
437
mundane Reasons and Forms, out of which the Uni verse is composed, and that the Universe is in it, as in a
the Matter. Cause, distinct from and without
P. 380
-AGREEABLE
fyc.~]
|y
WoRKS
ARE FASHIONED,
Nicomachus
ing an Artist
mente.
upon
Supreme BeDei
artifids
ry T
T^V/TK QsS
<avs/, in
Where
observes as follows
vypuras czirixs
rus
Ts%vmjv
pW
vov
>eov,
us
-sravlojv
ra,$
Xoy* avrwv
s^ovrx.
He
calls
GOD
an,
Reasons or Proportions. Soon after after which Painters work speaking of those Sketches, v and finish their Pictures, he subjoins WO-TTE^
and
their
'? T<z
roiavra
crx.taygatp'riiAoiTx
/SxlTTovIs?,
-cro/S/xsv
TOOE
n,
xsv*
vo<
AA
ftov, o
Iv
^e o;
TO)
Osw
Aoyo;
make
We must remember, ho&beauty all things here below. ever, that the Sketches here are imperfect ; but that the
other?, those
exist in
GOD,
ore
It
sents
according to this Philosophy, that Milton repreGod, after he had created this visible World, con-
templating
f 3
--how
438
ADDITIONAL
--
NOTES.
how
it t shot"d
In prospect from his throne, how good, how fair, ANSWERING HIS GREAT IDEA.
P. Lost, VII. 556.
or
'
Proclus proves the Existence of these GENERAL IDEAS UNIVERSAL FORMS by the following Arguments
Gravies
ayrw ru
ixoiti
IIVOLI
Tzoiuarix,
TO $
If*
ru
dire
rys
lavrS
fovrlgus
*syvg
uaias raTo
$-/
TO
'Cjo/tf/iAsyoy
'
O'IQV
TO
yL
otouo'i
ayTw TW
t/va/ -cro^r.
lf<
TO oitnov BV Tf
o X.O&IAOS /^
(>tu-
/ya/ iiTo/2y
i
TTO
TSCUTWS, bVff
ay
>^
EV
TW
dirtu T
o sX^y*3v,
-
jA;oy, >^
ayS^wTToy
vififyfa't,
"^ "WTTOV,
Iv
^
1
ohus
TO, L^v))
T^ayios-,
Ta
a
iv
TW
'sjatvlt.
ravrac
ciga,
ivgurus
>o
Ifiv
T^ a/T/a T
,
aAAo? ayQ^wTros
KXT&
|y
T^
/x/a
Ta
xocr/xa
If therefore
VERSE 6e a cause
#Aa^
rcA/c/i
z^/z/c^
from
own proper
ITS
it
Essence, SUCH CAUSE is PRIMARILY, WHAT EFFECT is SECONDARILY, and that which it is primarily,
its
^Effect secondarily.
to
It
is
thus
that Fire
Warmth
something
else,
and
is itself
warm
this
reasoning-
ADDITIONAL
NOTES.
439
reasoning you may perceive to be true in all things whatIt follows thereever , which operate merely by existing.
fore,
this
THAT THE CAUSE OF THE UNIVERSE, operating after manner, is THAT PRIMARILY, WHICH THE WORLD is
If therefore the
SECONDARILY.
-
WORLD
be the plenitude
of FORMS of ail Softs, these FORMS MUST ALSO BE PRIMARILY IN THE CAUSE OF THE WORLD, for it was the same
Cause , which constituted the Sun, and the Moon,
and
Cause
Forms
existing in
These
Man, and so
Form
else.
The
FORMS
the sensible
and external
are their
to this reasoning
are to
be found PRE-EX-
.ALL THE
UNIVERSE.
L. 3.
Prodi
MS.
in
Plat.
Parmemd.
We
have quoted the above passages for the same for the sake of those, who may ;
have a curiosity to see a sample of this antknt Philosophy, which (as some have held) may be traced up front
Plato and Socrates to Parmenides, Pythagoras, and Or-
pheus himself.
If the Phrase, to operate merely by existing, should ap-
pear questionable,
it
original,
That
440
ADDITIONAL
NOTES.
blind unconth
Author had long before prepared us, by uniting Knowwhere he forms the Characledge ztith natural Efficacy,
ter of these Divine
and Creative
Ideas.
But
let us
y
own Language.
iSecDr)
AV
$10,
uurui
ruv
(sc.
oc^o^ia-xo-Qatt
rut
v,
afro /XEV
<pv<rix.w9
izoiyrtKov, wv
^ K,
Groivcrt' JCTTO SE
ut
'GtoiSo-tv, li
vi,
yw
c/ivTta
TW
slvtxt tjoitio'i,
TXVTM
tvucrotvlss
^wrut
fxev ctirtxs
e1v<xi
voegxs trtivruv
wra,
<pv<Tiv
omoTEteiAsvov.
But
if
we should chuse
to defint
more known
to
us than themselves, let us assume from NATURAL PRINCIPLES THE POWER OF EFFECTING^ MERELY BY EXISTING^
all the things that they effect ;
CIPLES
although they did not effect them merely by existing ; and then uniting those two, let us say that IDEAS are at ones
the EFFICIENT
all things
pro
From book
the second of
Comment.
Aquinas, a subtle and acute
Divinum
Intellect-urn,
sicut artifieiata
The
ADDITIONAL
The Verses of Orpheus on
in the
NOTES.
this subjeft
441
may be found
Sylburg*
ytvero, Ztvf x. r. A.
Ztvs
affw
P. 391.
WHERE
Sfc."]
oar/z
'zstg If/
ex.e'ivo
TA nOAAA
TJf o T
/XE^/T/X,
xj
v,
TO EN
Krai
TO
w* IXa^foy, >c09rsf
I.^svatTTTfos
is
^o|e
Aayf^v aXA'
EN
ft 2
riANTA.
-^*
numerous as
DIVIDUALS by Partition, so numerous also 'is that PRINCIPLE OF UNITY by universal Impartiality. For it is
ONE, as a MINIMUM is one (according to what Speucippus seemed to say^) but it is ONE, as being ALE THINGS. Damascius ixti 'Awv MS.
not P.
408
THE
WISEST NATIONS
It
is
LANGUAGES.]
li
well observed
by Muretus
-- Nul-
unquam, qui
res ignorarent^
qucesierunt.
P. 411
-BUT
?]
The same Muretus has the following passage upon the ROMAN TASTE FOR PHILOSOPHY. Beati autcm illi^ et
--
opulenti^ et
in petendis
verbo componendis^ re compilandis occupati, philosophandi curam servis aut libertis suis., et Grccculis esurientibus relinquebant.
Ipsi9
442
ADDITIONAL
tern aliquant
NOTES.
libellum vel legendum
quod a voluptatibus reliquum erat temporis, ejus si par* aut ad audiendum Grcecum quempiam philosovel scribendum contulissent,
jam
1.
se
ad
eruditionis oilmen
pervenisse,
jam
somniabant.
INDEX.
NDE
it
X.
from other Attribiu
186.
DJECTIVE, how
differs
lives,
have no Genders,
190
and
use,
ADVERBS,
their character
192 to 194.
195. of
Ad-
Compa-
MoAd-
made out
of Prepositions, 205.
verbs of Interrogation, 206. affinity between these last, and the Pronoun relative, 206 to 208. Adverbs
every
Predicament,
210.
called
by
the
Stoics
nSe'jc1i7r,
Hid.
/ESCHINES,
419
his
ALEXANDER
Ac357
influence
AMAFANIUS,
412
AMMONIUS,
his account of Speech, and its relations, 4. of the Progress of human Knowledge from Complex to Simple, 10. of the Soul's two principal Powers, 17.
of the Species of Sentences, Hid. his notion of GOD, 55. quoted, 59. his notion of a Verb, 87, 193. his notion of Time, 100. illustrates from Homer the Species of Modes or Sentences, 145. quoted, 154. his
notion of conjunctive Particles, and of the /Unity which they produce, 241. quoted, 278. his account
<;f
6fc.
321,
328.
of
tfca
INDEX.
ine distinction between a Symbol and a Resemblance, 531. what he thought the human Body with respect
to the Soul, 334. his triple order of Ideas or Forms,
382
Analysis and Synthesis., 2, 3, 367. analysis of Cases, 275*
276, 285
-r-
269
47, 50
Words by
name
for the
Noun and
idea of a Pronoun, 65, 67. quoted, 70. explains the Distinction and Relation between the Article and th*
his
two Species of
As?!/* or Indi-
cation, 77. holds a wide difference between the Prepositive and Subjunctive Articles, 78. explains the nature of the Subjunctive Article, 80. corrects Homer
129.
holds the Soul's disposition peculiarly explained by Verbs, 141. his notion of the Indicative Mode, 151.
all
Imperatives,
Infinitive,
name
for
it,
166.
quoted,
168, 175.
his
notion of middle Verbs, 176. quoted, 179, 181, 195. explains the power and effect of the Greek Article^
217
to 222. holds
it,
it
essential to the
Pronoun not
to
coalesce with
different
when
idea of
261
APU-
INDEX.
APULEIUS, short account of him,
415 440
which of the
ibid.
420
notion of Truth,
3.
quoted
8. his
notion
of the difference between things absolutely prior, and relatively prior, 9, 10, quoted, 15. his Definition of a
Sentence,
19. of a word, 20. of Substance, 29. divides things into Substance and Accident, 30. how
many
34, Sfc. his notion of Genders, 42. his account of the metaphorical use of Sex, 48. quoted, 55, 55, 89. iiis Definition of a Verb, 96. his notion of a Now
or Instant, 102. of Sensation limited to it, 104, 105, 431. of Time, 106, 107. of Time's dependence on
the Soul, 112. quoted, 119, 193. his notion of Substance, 202.
calls
Euripides
why,
ibid,
224. his definition of a Conjunction, 239. a passage in his Rhetoric explained, 240. his account of Relahis notion of the divine Nature, 301, he thought it was probable the Gods should love, 302. his notion of Intellect and intelligible Obtives,
286.
whom
jects,
held Words founded in Compact, 314, 315. quoted, 310, 320. his account of the Elements or Letters, 324. his high notion of Principles, 325.
ibid,
between moveable and immoveable Existence, 360. between intellectual or divine Pleasure, and that which
is
compared with
that of
Man,
382.
INDEX.
362. of the difference between the Greeks and tht
his character, as a Writer, comwith Plato and Xenophon, 421. corresponds pared
Barbarians , 409.
with Alexander,
Arithmetic, founded
419
upon what
Principles, 352.
(Sea
Geometry.)
its
owes
its
Being to
ibid.
111, 352
ARTICLES, 31. their near alliance with Pronouns, 73. of two kinds, 214. the first kind, 214 to 232. the
second kind, 233 to 236. English Articles, their difference and use, 215. Greek Article, 219. Articles
denote pre-acquaintance, 218, 220. thence eminence and notoriety, 222 to 224. with what words they
associate, with
what
not,
224
to 229.
Greek Article
Articles,
"marks
prono-
ASCONIUS,
the first order, ATTRIBUTIVES, 30, 31. defined, 87. of 87 .to 191. of the second order, 192 to 211. Sec
ADVERB. VERB, PARTICIPLE, ADJECTIVE, of him as a Writer, 414 AULUS PELLIUS, short account
B
BACON,
his notion of Universal
Grammar,
2.
of antient
to modern, Z
of Symbols, of mental Separation or Division, 306. of the Analogy to convey our Thoughts, 334.
-
between
INDEX.
between the Geniuses of Nations and
guages,
their
Lan-
407
371.
Being or Existence,
mutable, immutable,* 90, See Truth, temporary, superior to Time, 91, 92.
GOD.
BELLISARIUS,
his
150
notion of Time present, BLEMMIDES, NICEPHORUS, 119. his Etymology of Ew/r^u, 36-8. his triple order
of
Forms or
Ideas,
386
Body, Instrument of the Mind, 305. chief Object of modern Philosophy, 308. confounded with Matter,
30P. human, the Mind's veil, 333. Body, that, or Mind, which has precedence in different Systems, 392 ?
393
BOERHAAVE,
BOETHIUS, how many
Parts of
321
Speech he admitted
as necessary to Logic,
GOD'S Exist-
ence, 92. illustrates from Virgil the Species of Modes or Sentences, 146. quoted, 312. held Language founded in Compact, 315. refers to the Deity's unalterable Nature, -361. his notion of original, intelligible Ideas, 397. of the difference between Time
(however Immense) and Eternity, 389. count of his Writings and character, Both differs from Two, how,
short ac-
416 227
41 3 5 419
BRUTUS,
C^SAR, C. JULIUS,
his
Laconic Epistle,
178
CAESAR, OCTAVIUS, influence of his Government upon the Roman Genius, 41 9 ? 420
CALLTMACUO,
-52
CASES,
INDEX.
CASES, scarce any such thing in
273. name
of,
whence, 277.
Genitive and
284
to 287. Vocative,
why
peculiar to the
Mode,
pecu-
liar
CHALCIDIUS, 301. short account of him, Chance, subsequent to Mind and Reason,
CHARISIUS, SOSIPATER,
CICERO, 132, 170, 269, 272, 311, 313,407, compelled to allow the unfitness of the Latin Tongue for Phi.
losophy, 411. one of the first that introduced it into the Latin Language, 412. Ciceronian and Socratic
Periods,
City)
,
418
48
128
197 to 199.
COMPARISON, degrees
it
why
Verbs admit
not, 200.
tives, ibid,
Substantives,
its
201
CONJUNCTION, 32,
Definition, 238.
two kinds,
240, 241. Conjunctions Copulative, 242. Cpntinuative, ibid. Suppositive, Positive, 244. Causal, Col.
245, 246. Disjunctive Simple, 252. AdversaAdversative absolute, 254. of Comparison, 255. Adequate, ibid. Inadequate, 256. Subdisjunctleftive,
tive, ibid.
ive,
258. Some Conjunctions have an obscure Signifi259 cation, when taken alone,
260.
its
two kinds, 237. its first kind, See CONJUNCsecond, 261 to 274.
its
TION, PREPOSITION.
CON-
IN D
Consonant^ what, and
Contraries,
x-
CONSENTIUS, his notion of the Neuter Gender, 43. of 198 middle Verbs, 177. of the positive Degree,
why
so called,
323
destructive
of
each other,
Conversation, what,
251 398
and
vice versa,
Attributes,
CORN. NEPOS,
Country, Feminine,
why,
D.
212 48
DAMASIUS,
441
Brother to Sleep,
52
278
367
,-.
See ARTICLES.
Arf^,
Derivatives
64, 76
DEMOSTHENES, more
rationally formed
why,
Design, necessarily implies Mind,
336
379, 434
419 DIOGENES, the Cynic, DIOGENES LAERTIUS, 34, 145, 154, 317, 322, 324, 407 DIONYSIUS of Halicarnassus, 34, 35
Diversity,
DONATUS,
E.
74, 272
Feminine, why,
47
Gg
ECCLE-
N D B
X.
why,
ibid,
See Letters.
Empiric, who,
Enclitics,
352
the Pronouns, their character, 84,
its
among
85
ENGLISH Tongue,
tive
a peculiar
power of
its
contradistinc-
and
enclitic
Pronouns, 85.
poverty as to the
expression of Modes and Tenses, 148. its analogy in the formation of Participles, 185, 186. neglected
by
illiterate
Writers,
ibid,
force and
power of
its
Ar-
ticles, 215 to 233. shews the Predicate of the Proposition by position, as also the Accusative Case of the
Sentence,
26,
274, 276.
its
character, as
a Lan-
guage,
EPICTETUS,
Evir[^v),
its
Etymology,
-t
"
340
52, 310, 331
294, 433
352
how,
Experiment,
ibid,
its
Form and
Matter, 2, 7. elementary Principles, 307. ibid, and mysteriously blended in their co-existence,
312. Form,
its
trans-
INDEX.
Speech, what, 315, 326, 327, &c. Form of Forms, 312. triple order of Forms in Art, 374. in Nature, 377. intelligible or specific Forms, their peculiar
'
character,
Fortune., Feminine,
why,
-*-
67
FULLER,
183
G.
GAZA THEODOEE,
his
Definition of a
Word,
21.
ex-
78.
his
account of the
of an Adverb, 195. arranges Adverbs by classes according to the order of the Predicaments,
210. explains the power of the Article, 218. quoted, 225. explains the different powers of conjunctive Par.
tides, 245. of disj unctive, 249. his singular explana-
tion of
a,
262, 271
his doctrine of
Ideas or intelligible Forms, 395 Genders, their origin, 41. their natural number, 42.
(See Sex)
why wanting
to the first
noun,
69
Species,
Genus and
why
mit of Number,
39
Geometry, founded on what Principles, 352. that and Arithmetic independent on Experiment, ibid. (See
Science.)
its Subject, what, the Mind, how,
it
to
ibid.
S^ov,
ibid,
Namen
%c.
immutable,
and
INDEX,
and superior to Time and its distinctions, 92. allwise, and always wise, 301. immediate objects of his Wisdom, what, ibid, whom among men he may be supposed to love, 302. Form of Forms, sovereign Artist, 312, 313, 437. above all Intensions and Remissions,
162, 359, 439. his Existence different from that of Man, how, 360; 362. his divine Attributes, 361. his
Existence necessarily infers that of Ideas or exemplary Forms, 379, 380, 436. exquisite Perfection of these
divine Ideas or Forms, 380, 437. his stupendous view
of
all
440
Good, above
sought by
luable for
all utility,
all
and totally
distinct
from
it,
297.
va-
all as
itself,
299.
GORGIAS,
52
philosophical or universal, 2.
6.
Grammar,
how
essential
to other Arts,
how
distinguished
from
other
11
of, in
naming Verbs Neuter, 177. In degrees of Comparison, 198. in the Syntax of Con238 junctions,
their character,
as a Nation, 415, #c. Asiatic
GREEKS,
Greeks, different
from the other Greeks, and why, 410. Grecian Genius, its maturity and decay, 417, #c.
Tongue, how perfect and Tenses, 147. force of
in the expression of
its
GREEK
Modes
Ad-
tenses, 156.
wrong
its
verbs, 289.
character, as a
Language,
GROCINUS,
his
H. HERAC-
INDEX.
H.
HERACLITUS, Saying
of, 8. his
370
HERMES,
his
Figure, Attributes,
325, 326.
HESIOD, called
by
Plato,
223
128
HOADLY'S Accidence,
HOMER,
50, 52, 82, 84, 145, 149, 221, 223, 235, 253,
HORACE,
142,
Ideas,
of what,
Words
if
only
consequence what, 337 to 339. general, their importance, 341, 342. undervalued by whom, and why, 350. of what faculty the
exist, the
particular were to
Objects, 360. their character, 362 to 366, 390. the only objects of Science and real Knowledge, why, 368.
acquired, how, 353, to 374. derived , whence, 374,
$c. their triple Order in Art, 376. the same in ture, 381. essential to Mind, why, 379, 380. the
Nafirst
434,
438
JEREMIAH,
from
405
by a finite number of Words, 214 to 217, 234, 346. 369 become objects of Knowledge 5 how,
,
INSTANT.
Intellect.
See
Now.
See Mind.
Gg
INTER-
INDEX,
%
INTERJECTIONS, their application and effect, 289. n distinct Part of Speech with the Greeks, though with
the Latins, 289. their character and description,
Eiterrogation,
its
290
and illustrated, 151, species explained to 154. Interrogates refuse the Article, why, 228 JOHANNES GRAMMAT. See PHII/OPONUS.
JSOCRATES,
42X
-7-
JULIAN,
41^ K.
KUSTER,
Knowledge,
if
176
LANGUAGE, how
in compact,
314, 327. (See Speech.) symbolic, not imitative, why, 332 to 355. impossible forlt to express
its
double capacity,
why
necessary, 348.
ibid,
its
its
what,
Precision
their Diversity,
whence,
ibid.
See
En~
LATIN Tongue,
and how
it
supplies,
peculiar use of the Prceteritum Perfectum, 131. has recourse to Auxiliars for some Modes and Tenses, 148. to a Periphrasis for some
Participles,
185.
in
what sense
it
has
it,
Articles,
276. right
Speech, 289, 290. its character, as a Language, 411. not made for Philosophy, ibid. 412. sunk with Boethius,
416
Letters,
INDEX.
Letters,
what Socrates thought of their Inventor, 325. divine honours paid him by the Egyptians, ibid. See
Element.
its
Liberty,
influence
420
300, 301, 432 44
LlNNvEUS,
Literature,
its cause, and that of Virtue, connected, 407. antient, recommended to the Study of the how, liberal, 424. its peculiar effect with regard to a man's
character,
425, 426
.
3,
4
41
of,
420
ibid.
LUCIAN,
LUCILIUS,
M.
MACROBIUS, short account of him, 414. quoted, 127, 157 j 168
Man,
rational
and
social,
1,2.
his peculiar
ornament,
what,
2. first or prior to
Man,
istence, the
to
manner
of,'
what, 359.
how most
likely
401. Medium, through which he derives them, what, 359, 393. his errors, whence, 406. to be corrected,
how,
iUd
Manuscripts quoted, of OLYMPIODORUS, 371, 394,395. of PHILOPONUS, 431, 433, 437. of PROCLUS, 434,
435, 438, 440. of DAMASCIUS, short account of him, Master Artist, what forms his character,
MARCIANUS CAPELLA,
441 415
111
Matter joined with Form, 2, 7. its original meaning, confounded by the Vulgar, how, 309. its extensive character according to antient Philosophy, 308. described
Gg4
by
I
by
Cicero, 313. of
D.E-X.
>
at large,
MAXIMUS TYRIUS,
his
Memory and
Metaphor,
its
from
ibid.
269
their Systems, what,
Metaphysicians modern,
392
MILTON, 13,
14, 44,
MIND
sal,
268. 404, 437. 107 to 112. univer(not Sense) recognizes time, 162, 311, 312, 359. differs not (as Sense does)
112, 124, 147, 207,
27,
its
through the body, in Part without it, 305. its high power of separation, 306, 366. penetrates into air
things,
307.
Nofa'TAnco*,
what, 310.
Mind
differs
from Sense, how, 364, 365. the source of Union bj Tiewing One in Many, 362 to 365. of Distinction by
viewing
Many
in
One 3
what, 380.
that or
Body, which has precedence, 392, fyc. Mind human, how spontaneous and easy in its Energies,
361, 362.
all
Minds
similar
MODES
or MOODS, whence derived) and to what end destined, 140. Declarative or Indicative, 141. Potential,
142. Subjunctive, 143. Interrogative, ibid. Inquisitive, ibid. Imperative, 144. Precative or Optative, ibid,
Virgil,
peculiar character,
Stoics, 164. other
162, 163.
how
dignified
it,
by the
166.
its
Modes
resolvable into
application ajid coalescence, 167. Mode of Science, of Conjecture, of to Proficiency, of Legislature, 168 170. Modes compared and distinguished, 149 to 160,
Greek
N D E
X.
illus-
156, 157
45
95
his
notion of the
Roibid.
MUSONIUS RUFUS,
N.
Barnes,
416
proper,
if
no
other
NATHAN
Nature,
346, 373
232
first
to Nature,
to
Man, how
359
NICEPHORUS.
See Blemmides.
NICOMACHUS,
NOUN,
or Substantive,
its
susceptible of
A Now or
it,
INSTANT, the
101,
Line, ibid, its use with respect to Time, 104. its minute and transient Presence illustrated, 117. by this Presence Time made present, 116, 117, 118. See
Number,
to
what words
it
appertains, and
why, 39, 40
o.
Objectors, ludicrous, 293. grave,
294
Ocean,
N D E
X.
-
4$
rhis noOLYMPIODOHUS, quoted from a Manuscript tion of Knowledge, and its degrees, 371,372, of ge-
of Science,
394, 395
ONE, by
to 265.
connectires, 241,
241,262 263
409L
441
132 X 141, 206
PARTICIPLE,
how
different
Adjective,
186.
See Attributive^
GLISH Tongues.
Particulars,
how, though
finite,
infinite,
expressed by
Words
351
^
which are
selves
wholly to them,
.
PAUSANIAS,
285
Perception xn& Volition, the Soul's leading Powers, 15, 17. Perception two-fold. 348. In Man what first, 9,
10, 353, 359. sensitive and intellective differ,
how,
371
364,365.
<
if
not correspondent to
its
objects, erro-
neous,
See Sentence.
in the
latter
Period.
PERIPATETIC Philosophy,
ages
commonly
united with the Platonic, 160. what species of Sentences it admitted, 144. its notion of Cases, 277.
314
PERJZONIUJ,
I
PERIZONIUS,
his
N D E
X.
of the
rational account
Persons in
171
short account of his charac-
413
first,
Persons,
second,
third,
their
Co to 67
Phansy, PfiiLOPONUs, his notion of Time, 431. of the business of
See Imagination.
Wisdom
Philosophy,
or Philosophy,
433.
reign Artist,
437
it
293, 294.
differs
proper business,
from modern,
chief
ibid
object, what,
Philosophers, antient,
who not
how,
Philosophers, modern,
269
their notion of Ideas, 350. their
employment, 351, their Criterion of Truth, ibid, deduce all from Body, 392. supply the place of occult
Qualities,
how,
393
its
Place, mediate and immediate, 118. applied to illustrate the present Time, and the present Instant, ibid,
its
Lati-
266
PLATO, 21.
his
how many
his account of
of, 269. quoted 325. in what he placed real happiness, 362. his two different and opposite Etymologies of VE^r^v, 3G9, 370. his Idea of Time,
coined
Word
as a writer,
com-
422
PLETHO.
INDEX.
PLETHO.
See GEMISTUS,
PUNY,
their
his
account
how
their
names upon
Works,
36
PLUTARCH,
Poetry, what,
33
5,
PORPHYRY,
Position,
its
39
force in Syntax,
PREPOSITIONS, 32.
26, 274, 276, 230 261. their use, 265. their defined, original Signification, 266. their subsequent and figu-
rative, 268. their different application, 270, 271. force in Composition, 271, 272. change into Adverbs,
Principles, to
272, 205 be estimated from their consequences, 7. 232, 236, 325. of Union and Diversity, their different ends and equal importance to the Universe, 250.
*(See
ONE, Union,
mysteriously blended,
difficult,
but one Pronoun of each sort, 71. ranges Articles with Pronouns according to the Stoics, 74. a per-
why
tinent observation
of his,
88.
explains
the double
125, 131. his doctrine concerning the Tenses, 130. -defines Moods or Modes, 141. his notion of the Imperative, 155. of
the Latin Prceteritum,
Power of
the Infinitive,
165,
1J3G.
175. o* precede the Infinitive, 168. of Im personals, Verbs Neuter, 177. of the Participle, 194. fef the Adverb,
195. of Comparatives,
INDEX.
reason
Article,
why
certain
225, 226. explains the different powers of Connectives which conjoin, 243, 244, 245. ot
Connectives
his
which
disjoin,
250.
quoted
262,
of Sound or
Voice,
his
~-
316
PROCLUS, Opinion about Rest, 95, 431. quoted, 310. the Source of the Doctrine of Ideas, 434, explains
435, 436, 438
PRONOUNS, why so
65, 66.
why
the
how
Language, 77. rePronoun, its nature and use, 78, to 83, those of the first and second person when expressed,
when not,
his
how dis-
why, 225
144
PROTAGORAS,
his,
Proverbs of Solomon,
405
124
PUBLIUS SYRUS,
Q.
QUINTILIAN,
Qualities
occult,
what
in
modern Philosophy
,
supplies
their place,
393
R.
Relatives, mutually infer each pther, 251, 286. usual Case, the Genitive,
their
ibid.
Rhetoric, what,
5. g
ROMANS
their character as a
S
Nation,
411.
S ALL us-
N D E
s.
X.
SALLUSIIUS PHILOSOPH.
401
pecting Speech, 5. quoted, 36, 163, 171. rejects Impersonals, 175. quoted, 202. his notion of the Conjunction, after Scaliger, 238. of the Interjection,
291
SCALIGER, his Etymology of Quis^ 82. his notion of Tenses from Grocinus^ 128. his elegant observation
account
how
23 3.
powers, 242, to 247, 258. his reason from Philosophy why Substantives do not
coalesce, 264. his origin
Etymology
Science, 5.
sent,
its
x)f
Sdentia^
370
Mode
its
why, 159.
246. defended}
ibid, for
consequences,
itself, 296 to 303- (See GOD.) pure and speculative depends on Principles the most simple,
Experi-
ment
self
to
it,
353. whole of
its
Division, 367.
and
its
See Mind.
-.
410
SENECA,
Sensation,
own
Objects
infinite,
I
ception,
N D E
how
its
X.
of attaching
ourselves
prior to Intellection,
Hid.
its
consequence
wholly to
379.
Objects, 351.
how
subsequent,
391
various Species inves-
from Milton, 147, 6fc. tigated, 14, 144 connection between Sentences and Modes,
Separation, corporeal inferior to mental,
why,
306
SEHVIUS,
SV.r,
132,2275432
want
it,
tkat in Nature
alone susceptible of
SIIAKSPEARE,
Ship, Feminine, why, SiMPOCifcs, his triple Order of Ideas or Forms, 381,
382
SOPHOCLES,
Souly
its
432
15, fyc.
leading Powers,
species
of,
Sound,
314,
317.
the
TAo,,
or Matter of
how
like,
how
unlike
to
Time,
1, 2.
100. See
Place.
Speech, peculiar
Ornament of Man,
how
resolved
or analysed, 2. its four principal Parts, and why these, and not others, 28, to 31. its Matter and Form
taken together, 307 to 315. its Matter taken separately, 316 to 326. its Form taken separately, 327
to 359. necessity of Speech, whence, 332, 333, foun-
ded in Compact,
314, 327
134, 104
SPEXSER,
Spirits, animal, subtle Ether,
Sfc.
their use in
modern Philosophy.
tccult.
INDEX.
STOICS,
Parts of Speech they held, 34. ranged Articles along with Pronouns, 74. their account of the Tenses, 130. multiplied the number of Sentences, 144. allowed the
tive only, into
how many
name of Verb
all
to the infini-
other
Modes
resolvable,
164 to 166.
and
notion of the Participle, 1 94. of the Adverb, 195. called the Adverb s7vSe>cta, and why, 210. called the
Preposition
<TVV$E<T(*OS
vrgoBerucGS,
2fH.
invented
new
269.
of the "TA
or Matter of
of Sound,
322.
324
Subject
in Greek)
230.
how
279
Substance and Attribute, 29. the great Objects of natural Union, 264. Substance susceptible of Sex, 171,
41.
of
Number, 40.
coincides
parison,
201, 202
SUBSTANTIVE, 30, 31. described, 37. primary, ibid, to 62. secondary, 63 to 67. (See NOUN^ PRONOUN.)
Substantive and Attributive,
analogous in Nature to
what,
2y//,Ca/x<x
279
no^ffvjpCdqppj &C.
180 45
of,
308, 309
ibid.
differs
in constituting
332
Tenses,,
INDEX.
T.
Tenses,
their natural
119,
120.
Tenses either passirg or completive, what authorities for these distinctions, 128 to 130*
Aorists, 123.
Prceteritum perfecttim of the Latins, peculiar uses of, 131 to 134. Imperfectum, peculiar uses of, 135 to
1 37.
order of Tenses in
for-
tuitous,
138
205, 206, 272
See ARTICLE.
9.
TERENCE,
THE and A.
THEMISTIUS,
his
notion
how
the
Mind
of lime, 108. of the dependance of Time on the Soul's existence, 112. of the latent transition of Nature from
THEODECTES,
259, 432 35
THEOPHRASTUS,
Relations, 4.
his notion of
Speech under
,
its
various
419
76, 132, 133
See HERMES.
TIBULLUS,
Time, Masculine, why,
f)5,
50.
why
implied in every
its
division, 97.
how
like,
how
103. strictly speaking no Time present, 105. in what sense it may be called present, 116, 117,432. all
divisible and extended, 118, 100, X01. no obof Sensation, why, 105. how faint and shadowy ject in existence, 106, 431. how, and by what power, we
Time
gain
its
future,
110.
how
what
faculty.
112.
how
inti-
INDEX.
intimately connected \vith the Soul, ibid, order and value of its several Species, 113. what things exist in it,
its
in
it,
161,
50. described
See
Now
or IN-
all
distinctions
of present, past, and future, 90, 91, 92, 159, 160, 404, 405. (See Being, GOD.) its place or region, 162,
372. seen in Composition and Division, 3, 367, even
negative,
in some degree synthetical, 3, 250, 364, Truth One, and so recognized, how, 364, 36d. every
factitious Truth,
403
V.
VARRO,
VERB,
31.
its
413
more
loose,
as well as
more
strict
accep-
Verb,
Adjectives,
implies Time,
119.
Modes
or
tible of
Number and
173. active,
Person, 170, Species of Verbs, 174. passive, ibid, middle, 175, 176.
127. formed out of Substan-
siderative or meditative,
tives,
sonate rejected,
175
Verbs Substantives, their pre-eminence, 88. essential to every Proposition, jibid. implied in every other Verb,
90, 93. denote existence, 88. vary, as varies the
istence,
ExSee
I
Verses, logical,
Vice,
N D E
X.
340 56
Feminine; why,
VIRGIL, 46, 47, 48, 49, 57, 68, 83, 132. his peculiar method of coupling the passing and completive Tenses,
133 to 136. quoted, 141, 182, 1-98, 199, 206, 235, 286, 287, 889, 401, 432. his idea of the Roman Genius,
Virtue, Feminine,
fer,
55.
human understand425
Union, natural, the great objects of, 264, 279. per. ceired by what power, 363. in every Truth, whence
derived,
365
See World.
318.
simple, produced
Universe.
Voice, defined,
differs
from
articulate,
how,
ibid, articulate,
319 to 324.
321 to 323.
Vossius,
Vowel, what, and
Utility,
ral,
35, 75,
290
why
so called,
321, 322
always and only sought by the sordid and illibe294, 295, 298. yet could have no Being, were
it,
297.
See Good.
W.
Whole and Parts, Wisdom, how some Philosophers thought
from Wit,
.
7
368, 433.
it
distinguished
WORDS,
IN D
WORDS,
23
lation,
X.
by Reby
as-
to 31. significant
by
27. variable,
invariable,
24.
significant
by Relation and
significant by Compact, 3 14, and not Imitations, 332. Symbols, of 327. Symbols, what not, 337 to 341. Symbols, of what, 341 to 349,
213 to 274.
Number
finite,
able to express
World,
visible and external, the passing Picture of what, 383, 437. preserved one and the same, though ever changing, how, 384, 385. its Cause not void of Rea-
son,
436
259, 260
X.
XEWOPHON,
56, 407. his character, as a Writer, comwith Plato and Aristotle, 422, 423 pared
Y.
308. See
-,
Sylva.
7+*-
OF THE
UNIVERSITY
FINIS.
i
Wright, Printer, St. John's Square, ClerkenweB.
RETURN
CIRCULATION DEPARTMENT
198 Main Stacks
1
A5\